<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.0//EN"
               "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.0/docbookx.dtd"
	       [<!ENTITY mdash "&#8212;">]>
<!--
 - Copyright (C) 2004-2006  Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
 - Copyright (C) 2000-2003  Internet Software Consortium.
 -
 - Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
 - purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
 - copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
 -
 - THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
 - REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
 - AND FITNESS.  IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
 - INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
 - LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
 - OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
 - PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
-->

<!-- File: $Id: Bv9ARM-book.xml,v 1.241.18.64 2006/09/13 00:20:49 marka Exp $ -->
<book xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude">
  <title>BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual</title>

  <bookinfo>
    <copyright>
      <year>2004</year>
      <year>2005</year>
      <year>2006</year>
      <holder>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")</holder>
    </copyright>
    <copyright>
      <year>2000</year>
      <year>2001</year>
      <year>2002</year>
      <year>2003</year>
      <holder>Internet Software Consortium.</holder>
    </copyright>
  </bookinfo>

  <chapter id="Bv9ARM.ch01">
    <title>Introduction</title>
    <para>
      The Internet Domain Name System (<acronym>DNS</acronym>)
      consists of the syntax
      to specify the names of entities in the Internet in a hierarchical
      manner, the rules used for delegating authority over names, and the
      system implementation that actually maps names to Internet
      addresses.  <acronym>DNS</acronym> data is maintained in a
      group of distributed
      hierarchical databases.
    </para>

    <sect1>
      <title>Scope of Document</title>

      <para>
        The Berkeley Internet Name Domain
        (<acronym>BIND</acronym>) implements a
        domain name server for a number of operating systems. This
        document provides basic information about the installation and
        care of the Internet Systems Consortium (<acronym>ISC</acronym>)
        <acronym>BIND</acronym> version 9 software package for
        system administrators.
      </para>

      <para>
        This version of the manual corresponds to BIND version 9.4.
      </para>

    </sect1>
    <sect1>
      <title>Organization of This Document</title>
      <para>
        In this document, <emphasis>Section 1</emphasis> introduces
        the basic <acronym>DNS</acronym> and <acronym>BIND</acronym> concepts. <emphasis>Section 2</emphasis>
        describes resource requirements for running <acronym>BIND</acronym> in various
        environments. Information in <emphasis>Section 3</emphasis> is
        <emphasis>task-oriented</emphasis> in its presentation and is
        organized functionally, to aid in the process of installing the
        <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 software. The task-oriented
        section is followed by
        <emphasis>Section 4</emphasis>, which contains more advanced
        concepts that the system administrator may need for implementing
        certain options. <emphasis>Section 5</emphasis>
        describes the <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 lightweight
        resolver.  The contents of <emphasis>Section 6</emphasis> are
        organized as in a reference manual to aid in the ongoing
        maintenance of the software. <emphasis>Section 7</emphasis> addresses
        security considerations, and
        <emphasis>Section 8</emphasis> contains troubleshooting help. The
        main body of the document is followed by several
        <emphasis>Appendices</emphasis> which contain useful reference
        information, such as a <emphasis>Bibliography</emphasis> and
        historic information related to <acronym>BIND</acronym>
        and the Domain Name
        System.
      </para>
    </sect1>
    <sect1>
      <title>Conventions Used in This Document</title>

      <para>
        In this document, we use the following general typographic
        conventions:
      </para>

      <informaltable>
        <tgroup cols="2">
          <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colwidth="3.000in"/>
          <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colwidth="2.625in"/>
          <tbody>
            <row>
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <emphasis>To describe:</emphasis>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  <emphasis>We use the style:</emphasis>
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row>
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  a pathname, filename, URL, hostname,
                  mailing list name, or new term or concept
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  <filename>Fixed width</filename>
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row>
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  literal user
                  input
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  <userinput>Fixed Width Bold</userinput>
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row>
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  program output
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  <computeroutput>Fixed Width</computeroutput>
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
          </tbody>
        </tgroup>
      </informaltable>

      <para>
        The following conventions are used in descriptions of the
        <acronym>BIND</acronym> configuration file:<informaltable colsep="0" frame="all" rowsep="0">
                  <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="2Level-table">
                      <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="3.000in"/>
            <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="2.625in"/>
            <tbody>
              <row rowsep="0">
                <entry colname="1" colsep="1" rowsep="1">
                  <para>
                    <emphasis>To describe:</emphasis>
                  </para>
                </entry>
                <entry colname="2" rowsep="1">
                  <para>
                    <emphasis>We use the style:</emphasis>
                  </para>
                </entry>
              </row>
              <row rowsep="0">
                <entry colname="1" colsep="1" rowsep="1">
                  <para>
                    keywords
                  </para>
                </entry>
                <entry colname="2" rowsep="1">
                  <para>
                    <literal>Fixed Width</literal>
                  </para>
                </entry>
              </row>
              <row rowsep="0">
                <entry colname="1" colsep="1" rowsep="1">
                  <para>
                    variables
                  </para>
                </entry>
                <entry colname="2" rowsep="1">
                  <para>
                    <varname>Fixed Width</varname>
                  </para>
                </entry>
              </row>
              <row rowsep="0">
                <entry colname="1" colsep="1">
                  <para>
                    Optional input
                  </para>
                </entry>
                <entry colname="2">
                  <para>
                    <optional>Text is enclosed in square brackets</optional>
                  </para>
                </entry>
              </row>
            </tbody>
          </tgroup>
        </informaltable>
      </para>
    </sect1>
    <sect1>
      <title>The Domain Name System (<acronym>DNS</acronym>)</title>
      <para>
        The purpose of this document is to explain the installation
        and upkeep of the <acronym>BIND</acronym> software
        package, and we
        begin by reviewing the fundamentals of the Domain Name System
        (<acronym>DNS</acronym>) as they relate to <acronym>BIND</acronym>.
      </para>

      <sect2>
        <title>DNS Fundamentals</title>

        <para>
          The Domain Name System (DNS) is a hierarchical, distributed
          database.  It stores information for mapping Internet host names to
          IP
          addresses and vice versa, mail routing information, and other data
          used by Internet applications.
        </para>

        <para>
          Clients look up information in the DNS by calling a
          <emphasis>resolver</emphasis> library, which sends queries to one or
          more <emphasis>name servers</emphasis> and interprets the responses.
          The <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 software distribution
          contains a
          name server, <command>named</command>, and two resolver
          libraries, <command>liblwres</command> and <command>libbind</command>.
        </para>

        </sect2><sect2>
        <title>Domains and Domain Names</title>

        <para>
          The data stored in the DNS is identified by <emphasis>domain names</emphasis> that are organized as a tree according to
          organizational or administrative boundaries. Each node of the tree,
          called a <emphasis>domain</emphasis>, is given a label. The domain
          name of the
          node is the concatenation of all the labels on the path from the
          node to the <emphasis>root</emphasis> node.  This is represented
          in written form as a string of labels listed from right to left and
          separated by dots. A label need only be unique within its parent
          domain.
        </para>

        <para>
          For example, a domain name for a host at the
          company <emphasis>Example, Inc.</emphasis> could be
          <literal>ourhost.example.com</literal>,
          where <literal>com</literal> is the
          top level domain to which
          <literal>ourhost.example.com</literal> belongs,
          <literal>example</literal> is
          a subdomain of <literal>com</literal>, and
          <literal>ourhost</literal> is the
          name of the host.
        </para>

        <para>
          For administrative purposes, the name space is partitioned into
          areas called <emphasis>zones</emphasis>, each starting at a node and
          extending down to the leaf nodes or to nodes where other zones
          start.
          The data for each zone is stored in a <emphasis>name server</emphasis>, which answers queries about the zone using the
          <emphasis>DNS protocol</emphasis>.
        </para>

        <para>
          The data associated with each domain name is stored in the
          form of <emphasis>resource records</emphasis> (<acronym>RR</acronym>s).
          Some of the supported resource record types are described in
          <xref linkend="types_of_resource_records_and_when_to_use_them"/>.
        </para>

        <para>
          For more detailed information about the design of the DNS and
          the DNS protocol, please refer to the standards documents listed in
          <xref linkend="rfcs"/>.
        </para>
      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title>Zones</title>
        <para>
          To properly operate a name server, it is important to understand
          the difference between a <emphasis>zone</emphasis>
          and a <emphasis>domain</emphasis>.
        </para>

        <para>
          As stated previously, a zone is a point of delegation in
          the <acronym>DNS</acronym> tree. A zone consists of
          those contiguous parts of the domain
          tree for which a name server has complete information and over which
          it has authority. It contains all domain names from a certain point
          downward in the domain tree except those which are delegated to
          other zones. A delegation point is marked by one or more
          <emphasis>NS records</emphasis> in the
          parent zone, which should be matched by equivalent NS records at
          the root of the delegated zone.
        </para>

        <para>
          For instance, consider the <literal>example.com</literal>
          domain which includes names
          such as <literal>host.aaa.example.com</literal> and
          <literal>host.bbb.example.com</literal> even though
          the <literal>example.com</literal> zone includes
          only delegations for the <literal>aaa.example.com</literal> and
          <literal>bbb.example.com</literal> zones.  A zone can
          map
          exactly to a single domain, but could also include only part of a
          domain, the rest of which could be delegated to other
          name servers. Every name in the <acronym>DNS</acronym>
          tree is a
          <emphasis>domain</emphasis>, even if it is
          <emphasis>terminal</emphasis>, that is, has no
          <emphasis>subdomains</emphasis>.  Every subdomain is a domain and
          every domain except the root is also a subdomain. The terminology is
          not intuitive and we suggest that you read RFCs 1033, 1034 and 1035
          to
          gain a complete understanding of this difficult and subtle
          topic.
        </para>

        <para>
          Though <acronym>BIND</acronym> is called a "domain name
          server",
          it deals primarily in terms of zones. The master and slave
          declarations in the <filename>named.conf</filename> file
          specify
          zones, not domains. When you ask some other site if it is willing to
          be a slave server for your <emphasis>domain</emphasis>, you are
          actually asking for slave service for some collection of zones.
        </para>
      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title>Authoritative Name Servers</title>

        <para>
          Each zone is served by at least
          one <emphasis>authoritative name server</emphasis>,
          which contains the complete data for the zone.
          To make the DNS tolerant of server and network failures,
          most zones have two or more authoritative servers, on
          different networks.
        </para>

        <para>
          Responses from authoritative servers have the "authoritative
          answer" (AA) bit set in the response packets.  This makes them
          easy to identify when debugging DNS configurations using tools like
          <command>dig</command> (<xref linkend="diagnostic_tools"/>).
        </para>

        <sect3>
          <title>The Primary Master</title>

          <para>
            The authoritative server where the master copy of the zone
            data is maintained is called the
	    <emphasis>primary master</emphasis> server, or simply the
            <emphasis>primary</emphasis>.  Typically it loads the zone
            contents from some local file edited by humans or perhaps
            generated mechanically from some other local file which is
            edited by humans.  This file is called the
	    <emphasis>zone file</emphasis> or
	    <emphasis>master file</emphasis>.
          </para>

	  <para>
	    In some cases, however, the master file may not be edited
	    by humans at all, but may instead be the result of
	    <emphasis>dynamic update</emphasis> operations.
	  </para>
        </sect3>

        <sect3>
          <title>Slave Servers</title>
          <para>
            The other authoritative servers, the <emphasis>slave</emphasis>
            servers (also known as <emphasis>secondary</emphasis> servers)
            load
            the zone contents from another server using a replication process
            known as a <emphasis>zone transfer</emphasis>.  Typically the data
            are
            transferred directly from the primary master, but it is also
            possible
            to transfer it from another slave.  In other words, a slave server
            may itself act as a master to a subordinate slave server.
          </para>
        </sect3>

        <sect3>
          <title>Stealth Servers</title>

          <para>
            Usually all of the zone's authoritative servers are listed in
            NS records in the parent zone.  These NS records constitute
            a <emphasis>delegation</emphasis> of the zone from the parent.
            The authoritative servers are also listed in the zone file itself,
            at the <emphasis>top level</emphasis> or <emphasis>apex</emphasis>
            of the zone.  You can list servers in the zone's top-level NS
            records that are not in the parent's NS delegation, but you cannot
            list servers in the parent's delegation that are not present at
            the zone's top level.
          </para>

          <para>
            A <emphasis>stealth server</emphasis> is a server that is
            authoritative for a zone but is not listed in that zone's NS
            records.  Stealth servers can be used for keeping a local copy of
            a
            zone to speed up access to the zone's records or to make sure that
            the
            zone is available even if all the "official" servers for the zone
            are
            inaccessible.
          </para>

          <para>
            A configuration where the primary master server itself is a
            stealth server is often referred to as a "hidden primary"
            configuration.  One use for this configuration is when the primary
            master
            is behind a firewall and therefore unable to communicate directly
            with the outside world.
          </para>

        </sect3>

      </sect2>
      <sect2>

        <title>Caching Name Servers</title>

	<!--
	  - Terminology here is inconsistant.  Probably ought to
	  - convert to using "recursive name server" everywhere
	  - with just a note about "caching" terminology.
	  -->

        <para>
          The resolver libraries provided by most operating systems are
          <emphasis>stub resolvers</emphasis>, meaning that they are not
          capable of
          performing the full DNS resolution process by themselves by talking
          directly to the authoritative servers.  Instead, they rely on a
          local
          name server to perform the resolution on their behalf.  Such a
          server
          is called a <emphasis>recursive</emphasis> name server; it performs
          <emphasis>recursive lookups</emphasis> for local clients.
        </para>

        <para>
          To improve performance, recursive servers cache the results of
          the lookups they perform.  Since the processes of recursion and
          caching are intimately connected, the terms
          <emphasis>recursive server</emphasis> and
          <emphasis>caching server</emphasis> are often used synonymously.
        </para>

        <para>
          The length of time for which a record may be retained in
          the cache of a caching name server is controlled by the
          Time To Live (TTL) field associated with each resource record.
        </para>

        <sect3>
          <title>Forwarding</title>

          <para>
            Even a caching name server does not necessarily perform
            the complete recursive lookup itself.  Instead, it can
            <emphasis>forward</emphasis> some or all of the queries
            that it cannot satisfy from its cache to another caching name
            server,
            commonly referred to as a <emphasis>forwarder</emphasis>.
          </para>

          <para>
            There may be one or more forwarders,
            and they are queried in turn until the list is exhausted or an
            answer
            is found. Forwarders are typically used when you do not
            wish all the servers at a given site to interact directly with the
            rest of
            the Internet servers. A typical scenario would involve a number
            of internal <acronym>DNS</acronym> servers and an
            Internet firewall. Servers unable
            to pass packets through the firewall would forward to the server
            that can do it, and that server would query the Internet <acronym>DNS</acronym> servers
            on the internal server's behalf.
          </para>
        </sect3>

      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title>Name Servers in Multiple Roles</title>

        <para>
          The <acronym>BIND</acronym> name server can
          simultaneously act as
          a master for some zones, a slave for other zones, and as a caching
          (recursive) server for a set of local clients.
        </para>

        <para>
          However, since the functions of authoritative name service
          and caching/recursive name service are logically separate, it is
          often advantageous to run them on separate server machines.

          A server that only provides authoritative name service
          (an <emphasis>authoritative-only</emphasis> server) can run with
          recursion disabled, improving reliability and security.

          A server that is not authoritative for any zones and only provides
          recursive service to local
          clients (a <emphasis>caching-only</emphasis> server)
          does not need to be reachable from the Internet at large and can
          be placed inside a firewall.
        </para>

      </sect2>
    </sect1>

  </chapter>

  <chapter id="Bv9ARM.ch02">
    <title><acronym>BIND</acronym> Resource Requirements</title>

    <sect1>
      <title>Hardware requirements</title>

      <para>
        <acronym>DNS</acronym> hardware requirements have
        traditionally been quite modest.
        For many installations, servers that have been pensioned off from
        active duty have performed admirably as <acronym>DNS</acronym> servers.
      </para>
      <para>
        The DNSSEC features of <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9
        may prove to be quite
        CPU intensive however, so organizations that make heavy use of these
        features may wish to consider larger systems for these applications.
        <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 is fully multithreaded, allowing
        full utilization of
        multiprocessor systems for installations that need it.
      </para>
    </sect1>
    <sect1>
      <title>CPU Requirements</title>
      <para>
        CPU requirements for <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 range from
        i486-class machines
        for serving of static zones without caching, to enterprise-class
        machines if you intend to process many dynamic updates and DNSSEC
        signed zones, serving many thousands of queries per second.
      </para>
    </sect1>

    <sect1>
      <title>Memory Requirements</title>
      <para>
        The memory of the server has to be large enough to fit the
        cache and zones loaded off disk.  The <command>max-cache-size</command>
        option can be used to limit the amount of memory used by the cache,
        at the expense of reducing cache hit rates and causing more <acronym>DNS</acronym>
        traffic.
        Additionally, if additional section caching
        (<xref linkend="acache"/>) is enabled,
        the <command>max-acache-size</command> can be used to
        limit the amount
        of memory used by the mechanism.
        It is still good practice to have enough memory to load
        all zone and cache data into memory &mdash; unfortunately, the best
        way
        to determine this for a given installation is to watch the name server
        in operation. After a few weeks the server process should reach
        a relatively stable size where entries are expiring from the cache as
        fast as they are being inserted.
      </para>
      <!--
        - Add something here about leaving overhead for attacks?
	- How much overhead?  Percentage?
        -->
    </sect1>

    <sect1>
      <title>Name Server Intensive Environment Issues</title>
      <para>
        For name server intensive environments, there are two alternative
        configurations that may be used. The first is where clients and
        any second-level internal name servers query a main name server, which
        has enough memory to build a large cache. This approach minimizes
        the bandwidth used by external name lookups. The second alternative
        is to set up second-level internal name servers to make queries
        independently.
        In this configuration, none of the individual machines needs to
        have as much memory or CPU power as in the first alternative, but
        this has the disadvantage of making many more external queries,
        as none of the name servers share their cached data.
      </para>
    </sect1>

    <sect1>
      <title>Supported Operating Systems</title>
      <para>
        ISC <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 compiles and runs on a large
        number
        of Unix-like operating system and on NT-derived versions of
        Microsoft Windows such as Windows 2000 and Windows XP.  For an
        up-to-date
        list of supported systems, see the README file in the top level
        directory
        of the BIND 9 source distribution.
      </para>
    </sect1>
  </chapter>

  <chapter id="Bv9ARM.ch03">
    <title>Name Server Configuration</title>
    <para>
      In this section we provide some suggested configurations along
      with guidelines for their use.  We suggest reasonable values for
      certain option settings.
    </para>

    <sect1 id="sample_configuration">
      <title>Sample Configurations</title>
      <sect2>
        <title>A Caching-only Name Server</title>
        <para>
          The following sample configuration is appropriate for a caching-only
          name server for use by clients internal to a corporation.  All
          queries
          from outside clients are refused using the <command>allow-query</command>
          option.  Alternatively, the same effect could be achieved using
          suitable
          firewall rules.
        </para>

<programlisting>
// Two corporate subnets we wish to allow queries from.
acl corpnets { 192.168.4.0/24; 192.168.7.0/24; };
options {
     directory "/etc/namedb";           // Working directory
     allow-query { corpnets; };
};
// Provide a reverse mapping for the loopback address 127.0.0.1
zone "0.0.127.in-addr.arpa" {
     type master;
     file "localhost.rev";
     notify no;
};
</programlisting>

      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title>An Authoritative-only Name Server</title>
        <para>
          This sample configuration is for an authoritative-only server
          that is the master server for "<filename>example.com</filename>"
          and a slave for the subdomain "<filename>eng.example.com</filename>".
        </para>

<programlisting>
options {
     directory "/etc/namedb";           // Working directory
     allow-query-cache { none; };       // Do not allow access to cache
     allow-query { any; };              // This is the default
     recursion no;                      // Do not provide recursive service
};

// Provide a reverse mapping for the loopback address 127.0.0.1
zone "0.0.127.in-addr.arpa" {
     type master;
     file "localhost.rev";
     notify no;
};
// We are the master server for example.com
zone "example.com" {
     type master;
     file "example.com.db";
     // IP addresses of slave servers allowed to transfer example.com
     allow-transfer {
          192.168.4.14;
          192.168.5.53;
     };
};
// We are a slave server for eng.example.com
zone "eng.example.com" {
     type slave;
     file "eng.example.com.bk";
     // IP address of eng.example.com master server
     masters { 192.168.4.12; };
};
</programlisting>

      </sect2>
    </sect1>

    <sect1>
      <title>Load Balancing</title>
      <!--
        - Add explanation of why load balancing is fragile at best
	- and completely pointless in the general case.
        -->

      <para>
        A primitive form of load balancing can be achieved in
        the <acronym>DNS</acronym> by using multiple A records for
        one name.
      </para>

      <para>
        For example, if you have three WWW servers with network addresses
        of 10.0.0.1, 10.0.0.2 and 10.0.0.3, a set of records such as the
        following means that clients will connect to each machine one third
        of the time:
      </para>

      <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
        <tgroup cols="5" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="2Level-table">
          <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="0.875in"/>
          <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="0.500in"/>
          <colspec colname="3" colnum="3" colsep="0" colwidth="0.750in"/>
          <colspec colname="4" colnum="4" colsep="0" colwidth="0.750in"/>
          <colspec colname="5" colnum="5" colsep="0" colwidth="2.028in"/>
          <tbody>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  Name
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  TTL
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="3">
                <para>
                  CLASS
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="4">
                <para>
                  TYPE
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="5">
                <para>
                  Resource Record (RR) Data
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <literal>www</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  <literal>600</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="3">
                <para>
                  <literal>IN</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="4">
                <para>
                  <literal>A</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="5">
                <para>
                  <literal>10.0.0.1</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para/>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  <literal>600</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="3">
                <para>
                  <literal>IN</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="4">
                <para>
                  <literal>A</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="5">
                <para>
                  <literal>10.0.0.2</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para/>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  <literal>600</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="3">
                <para>
                  <literal>IN</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="4">
                <para>
                  <literal>A</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="5">
                <para>
                  <literal>10.0.0.3</literal>
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
          </tbody>
        </tgroup>
      </informaltable>
      <para>
        When a resolver queries for these records, <acronym>BIND</acronym> will rotate
        them and respond to the query with the records in a different
        order.  In the example above, clients will randomly receive
        records in the order 1, 2, 3; 2, 3, 1; and 3, 1, 2. Most clients
        will use the first record returned and discard the rest.
      </para>
      <para>
        For more detail on ordering responses, check the
        <command>rrset-order</command> substatement in the
        <command>options</command> statement, see
        <xref endterm="rrset_ordering_title" linkend="rrset_ordering"/>.
      </para>

    </sect1>

    <sect1>
      <title>Name Server Operations</title>

      <sect2>
        <title>Tools for Use With the Name Server Daemon</title>
        <para>
          This section describes several indispensable diagnostic,
          administrative and monitoring tools available to the system
          administrator for controlling and debugging the name server
          daemon.
        </para>
        <sect3 id="diagnostic_tools">
          <title>Diagnostic Tools</title>
          <para>
            The <command>dig</command>, <command>host</command>, and
            <command>nslookup</command> programs are all command
            line tools
            for manually querying name servers.  They differ in style and
            output format.
          </para>

          <variablelist>
            <varlistentry>
              <term id="dig"><command>dig</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The domain information groper (<command>dig</command>)
                  is the most versatile and complete of these lookup tools.
                  It has two modes: simple interactive
                  mode for a single query, and batch mode which executes a
                  query for
                  each in a list of several query lines. All query options are
                  accessible
                  from the command line.
                </para>
                <cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
                  <command>dig</command>
                  <arg>@<replaceable>server</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg choice="plain"><replaceable>domain</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg><replaceable>query-type</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg><replaceable>query-class</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>+<replaceable>query-option</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-<replaceable>dig-option</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>%<replaceable>comment</replaceable></arg>
                </cmdsynopsis>
                <para>
                  The usual simple use of dig will take the form
                </para>
                <simpara>
                  <command>dig @server domain query-type query-class</command>
                </simpara>
                <para>
                  For more information and a list of available commands and
                  options, see the <command>dig</command> man
                  page.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>host</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The <command>host</command> utility emphasizes
                  simplicity
                  and ease of use.  By default, it converts
                  between host names and Internet addresses, but its
                  functionality
                  can be extended with the use of options.
                </para>
                <cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
                  <command>host</command>
                  <arg>-aCdlrTwv</arg>
                  <arg>-c <replaceable>class</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-N <replaceable>ndots</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-t <replaceable>type</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-W <replaceable>timeout</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-R <replaceable>retries</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg choice="plain"><replaceable>hostname</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg><replaceable>server</replaceable></arg>
                </cmdsynopsis>
                <para>
                  For more information and a list of available commands and
                  options, see the <command>host</command> man
                  page.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>nslookup</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para><command>nslookup</command>
		  has two modes: interactive and
                  non-interactive. Interactive mode allows the user to
                  query name servers for information about various
                  hosts and domains or to print a list of hosts in a
                  domain. Non-interactive mode is used to print just
                  the name and requested information for a host or
                  domain.
                </para>
                <cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
                  <command>nslookup</command>
                  <arg rep="repeat">-option</arg>
                  <group>
                    <arg><replaceable>host-to-find</replaceable></arg>
                    <arg>- <arg>server</arg></arg>
                  </group>
                </cmdsynopsis>
                <para>
                  Interactive mode is entered when no arguments are given (the
                  default name server will be used) or when the first argument
                  is a
                  hyphen (`-') and the second argument is the host name or
                  Internet address
                  of a name server.
                </para>
                <para>
                  Non-interactive mode is used when the name or Internet
                  address
                  of the host to be looked up is given as the first argument.
                  The
                  optional second argument specifies the host name or address
                  of a name server.
                </para>
                <para>
                  Due to its arcane user interface and frequently inconsistent
                  behavior, we do not recommend the use of <command>nslookup</command>.
                  Use <command>dig</command> instead.
                </para>
              </listitem>

            </varlistentry>
          </variablelist>
        </sect3>

        <sect3 id="admin_tools">
          <title>Administrative Tools</title>
          <para>
            Administrative tools play an integral part in the management
            of a server.
          </para>
          <variablelist>
            <varlistentry id="named-checkconf" xreflabel="Named Configuration Checking application">

              <term><command>named-checkconf</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The <command>named-checkconf</command> program
                  checks the syntax of a <filename>named.conf</filename> file.
                </para>
                <cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
                  <command>named-checkconf</command>
                  <arg>-jvz</arg>
                  <arg>-t <replaceable>directory</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg><replaceable>filename</replaceable></arg>
                </cmdsynopsis>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>
            <varlistentry id="named-checkzone" xreflabel="Zone Checking application">

              <term><command>named-checkzone</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The <command>named-checkzone</command> program
                  checks a master file for
                  syntax and consistency.
                </para>
                <cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
                  <command>named-checkzone</command>
                  <arg>-djqvD</arg>
                  <arg>-c <replaceable>class</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-o <replaceable>output</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-t <replaceable>directory</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-w <replaceable>directory</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-k <replaceable>(ignore|warn|fail)</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-n <replaceable>(ignore|warn|fail)</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-W <replaceable>(ignore|warn)</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg choice="plain"><replaceable>zone</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg><replaceable>filename</replaceable></arg>
                </cmdsynopsis>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>
	    <varlistentry id="named-compilezone" xreflabel="Zone Compilation aplication">
	      <term><command>named-compilezone</command></term>
	      <listitem>
		<para>
		  Similar to <command>named-checkzone,</command> but
		  it always dumps the zone content to a specified file
		  (typically in a different format).
		</para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>
            <varlistentry id="rndc" xreflabel="Remote Name Daemon Control application">

              <term><command>rndc</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The remote name daemon control
                  (<command>rndc</command>) program allows the
                  system
                  administrator to control the operation of a name server.
                  If you run <command>rndc</command> without any
                  options
                  it will display a usage message as follows:
                </para>
                <cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
                  <command>rndc</command>
                  <arg>-c <replaceable>config</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-s <replaceable>server</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-p <replaceable>port</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg>-y <replaceable>key</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg choice="plain"><replaceable>command</replaceable></arg>
                  <arg rep="repeat"><replaceable>command</replaceable></arg>
                </cmdsynopsis>
                <para>The <command>command</command>
		  is one of the following:
                </para>

                <variablelist>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>reload</userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Reload configuration file and zones.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>reload <replaceable>zone</replaceable>
                        <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable>
           <optional><replaceable>view</replaceable></optional></optional></userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Reload the given zone.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>refresh <replaceable>zone</replaceable>
                        <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable>
           <optional><replaceable>view</replaceable></optional></optional></userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Schedule zone maintenance for the given zone.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>retransfer <replaceable>zone</replaceable>

                        <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable>
           <optional><replaceable>view</replaceable></optional></optional></userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Retransfer the given zone from the master.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>

                    <term><userinput>freeze
                        <optional><replaceable>zone</replaceable>
       <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable>
           <optional><replaceable>view</replaceable></optional></optional></optional></userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Suspend updates to a dynamic zone.  If no zone is
                        specified,
                        then all zones are suspended.  This allows manual
                        edits to be made to a zone normally updated by dynamic
                        update.  It
                        also causes changes in the journal file to be synced
                        into the master
                        and the journal file to be removed.  All dynamic
                        update attempts will
                        be refused while the zone is frozen.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>thaw
                        <optional><replaceable>zone</replaceable>
       <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable>
           <optional><replaceable>view</replaceable></optional></optional></optional></userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Enable updates to a frozen dynamic zone.  If no zone
                        is
                        specified, then all frozen zones are enabled.  This
                        causes
                        the server to reload the zone from disk, and
                        re-enables dynamic updates
                        after the load has completed.  After a zone is thawed,
                        dynamic updates
                        will no longer be refused.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>notify <replaceable>zone</replaceable>
                        <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable>
           <optional><replaceable>view</replaceable></optional></optional></userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Resend NOTIFY messages for the zone.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>reconfig</userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Reload the configuration file and load new zones,
                        but do not reload existing zone files even if they
                        have changed.
                        This is faster than a full <command>reload</command> when there
                        is a large number of zones because it avoids the need
                        to examine the
                        modification times of the zones files.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>stats</userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Write server statistics to the statistics file.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>querylog</userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Toggle query logging. Query logging can also be enabled
                        by explicitly directing the <command>queries</command>
                        <command>category</command> to a
		        <command>channel</command> in the
                        <command>logging</command> section of
                        <filename>named.conf</filename> or by specifying
			<command>querylog yes;</command> in the
			<command>options</command> section of
			<filename>named.conf</filename>.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>dumpdb
                        <optional>-all|-cache|-zone</optional>
                        <optional><replaceable>view ...</replaceable></optional></userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Dump the server's caches (default) and/or zones to
                        the
                        dump file for the specified views.  If no view is
                        specified, all
                        views are dumped.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>stop <optional>-p</optional></userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Stop the server, making sure any recent changes
                        made through dynamic update or IXFR are first saved to
                        the master files of the updated zones.
			If -p is specified named's process id is returned.
			This allows an external process to determine when named
			had completed stopping.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>halt <optional>-p</optional></userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Stop the server immediately.  Recent changes
                        made through dynamic update or IXFR are not saved to
                        the master files, but will be rolled forward from the
			journal files when the server is restarted.
			If -p is specified named's process id is returned.
			This allows an external process to determine when named
			had completed halting.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>trace</userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Increment the servers debugging level by one.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>trace <replaceable>level</replaceable></userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Sets the server's debugging level to an explicit
                        value.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>notrace</userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Sets the server's debugging level to 0.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>flush</userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Flushes the server's cache.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>flushname</userinput> <replaceable>name</replaceable></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Flushes the given name from the server's cache.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>status</userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Display status of the server.
                        Note that the number of zones includes the internal <command>bind/CH</command> zone
                        and the default <command>./IN</command>
                        hint zone if there is not an
                        explicit root zone configured.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                  <varlistentry>
                    <term><userinput>recursing</userinput></term>
                    <listitem>
                      <para>
                        Dump the list of queries named is currently recursing
                        on.
                      </para>
                    </listitem>
                  </varlistentry>

                </variablelist>

                <para>
                  In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.2, <command>rndc</command>
                  supports all the commands of the BIND 8 <command>ndc</command>
                  utility except <command>ndc start</command> and
                  <command>ndc restart</command>, which were also
                  not supported in <command>ndc</command>'s
                  channel mode.
                </para>

                <para>
                  A configuration file is required, since all
                  communication with the server is authenticated with
                  digital signatures that rely on a shared secret, and
                  there is no way to provide that secret other than with a
                  configuration file.  The default location for the
                  <command>rndc</command> configuration file is
                  <filename>/etc/rndc.conf</filename>, but an
                  alternate
                  location can be specified with the <option>-c</option>
                  option.  If the configuration file is not found,
                  <command>rndc</command> will also look in
                  <filename>/etc/rndc.key</filename> (or whatever
                  <varname>sysconfdir</varname> was defined when
                  the <acronym>BIND</acronym> build was
                  configured).
                  The <filename>rndc.key</filename> file is
                  generated by
                  running <command>rndc-confgen -a</command> as
                  described in
                  <xref linkend="controls_statement_definition_and_usage"/>.
                </para>

                <para>
                  The format of the configuration file is similar to
                  that of <filename>named.conf</filename>, but
                  limited to
                  only four statements, the <command>options</command>,
                  <command>key</command>, <command>server</command> and
                  <command>include</command>
                  statements.  These statements are what associate the
                  secret keys to the servers with which they are meant to
                  be shared.  The order of statements is not
                  significant.
                </para>

                <para>
                  The <command>options</command> statement has
                  three clauses:
                  <command>default-server</command>, <command>default-key</command>,
                  and <command>default-port</command>.
                  <command>default-server</command> takes a
                  host name or address argument  and represents the server
                  that will
                  be contacted if no <option>-s</option>
                  option is provided on the command line.
                  <command>default-key</command> takes
                  the name of a key as its argument, as defined by a <command>key</command> statement.
                  <command>default-port</command> specifies the
                  port to which
                  <command>rndc</command> should connect if no
                  port is given on the command line or in a
                  <command>server</command> statement.
                </para>

                <para>
                  The <command>key</command> statement defines a
                  key to be used
                  by <command>rndc</command> when authenticating
                  with
                  <command>named</command>.  Its syntax is
                  identical to the
                  <command>key</command> statement in named.conf.
                  The keyword <userinput>key</userinput> is
                  followed by a key name, which must be a valid
                  domain name, though it need not actually be hierarchical;
                  thus,
                  a string like "<userinput>rndc_key</userinput>" is a valid
                  name.
                  The <command>key</command> statement has two
                  clauses:
                  <command>algorithm</command> and <command>secret</command>.
                  While the configuration parser will accept any string as the
                  argument
                  to algorithm, currently only the string "<userinput>hmac-md5</userinput>"
                  has any meaning.  The secret is a base-64 encoded string
		  as specified in RFC 3548.
                </para>

                <para>
                  The <command>server</command> statement
                  associates a key
                  defined using the <command>key</command>
                  statement with a server.
                  The keyword <userinput>server</userinput> is followed by a
                  host name or address.  The <command>server</command> statement
                  has two clauses: <command>key</command> and <command>port</command>.
                  The <command>key</command> clause specifies the
                  name of the key
                  to be used when communicating with this server, and the
                  <command>port</command> clause can be used to
                  specify the port <command>rndc</command> should
                  connect
                  to on the server.
                </para>

                <para>
                  A sample minimal configuration file is as follows:
                </para>

<programlisting>
key rndc_key {
     algorithm "hmac-md5";
     secret "c3Ryb25nIGVub3VnaCBmb3IgYSBtYW4gYnV0IG1hZGUgZm9yIGEgd29tYW4K";
};
options {
     default-server 127.0.0.1;
     default-key    rndc_key;
};
</programlisting>

                <para>
                  This file, if installed as <filename>/etc/rndc.conf</filename>,
                  would allow the command:
                </para>

                <para>
                  <prompt>$ </prompt><userinput>rndc reload</userinput>
                </para>

                <para>
                  to connect to 127.0.0.1 port 953 and cause the name server
                  to reload, if a name server on the local machine were
                  running with
                  following controls statements:
                </para>

<programlisting>
controls {
        inet 127.0.0.1 allow { localhost; } keys { rndc_key; };
};
</programlisting>

                <para>
                  and it had an identical key statement for
                  <literal>rndc_key</literal>.
                </para>

                <para>
                  Running the <command>rndc-confgen</command>
                  program will
                  conveniently create a <filename>rndc.conf</filename>
                  file for you, and also display the
                  corresponding <command>controls</command>
                  statement that you need to
                  add to <filename>named.conf</filename>.
                  Alternatively,
                  you can run <command>rndc-confgen -a</command>
                  to set up
                  a <filename>rndc.key</filename> file and not
                  modify
                  <filename>named.conf</filename> at all.
                </para>

              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>
          </variablelist>

        </sect3>
      </sect2>
      <sect2>

        <title>Signals</title>
        <para>
          Certain UNIX signals cause the name server to take specific
          actions, as described in the following table.  These signals can
          be sent using the <command>kill</command> command.
        </para>
        <informaltable frame="all">
          <tgroup cols="2">
            <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.125in"/>
            <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="4.000in"/>
            <tbody>
              <row rowsep="0">
                <entry colname="1">
                  <para><command>SIGHUP</command></para>
                </entry>
                <entry colname="2">
                  <para>
                    Causes the server to read <filename>named.conf</filename> and
                    reload the database.
                  </para>
                </entry>
              </row>
              <row rowsep="0">
                <entry colname="1">
                  <para><command>SIGTERM</command></para>
                </entry>
                <entry colname="2">
                  <para>
                    Causes the server to clean up and exit.
                  </para>
                </entry>
              </row>
              <row rowsep="0">
                <entry colname="1">
                  <para><command>SIGINT</command></para>
                </entry>
                <entry colname="2">
                  <para>
                    Causes the server to clean up and exit.
                  </para>
                </entry>
              </row>
            </tbody>
          </tgroup>
        </informaltable>
      </sect2>
    </sect1>
  </chapter>

  <chapter id="Bv9ARM.ch04">
    <title>Advanced DNS Features</title>

    <sect1 id="notify">

      <title>Notify</title>
      <para>
        <acronym>DNS</acronym> NOTIFY is a mechanism that allows master
        servers to notify their slave servers of changes to a zone's data. In
        response to a <command>NOTIFY</command> from a master server, the
        slave will check to see that its version of the zone is the
        current version and, if not, initiate a zone transfer.
      </para>

      <para>
        For more information about <acronym>DNS</acronym>
        <command>NOTIFY</command>, see the description of the
        <command>notify</command> option in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/> and
        the description of the zone option <command>also-notify</command> in
        <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.  The <command>NOTIFY</command>
        protocol is specified in RFC 1996.
      </para>

      <note>
	As a slave zone can also be a master to other slaves, named,
        by default, sends <command>NOTIFY</command> messages for every zone
	it loads.  Specifying <command>notify master-only;</command> will
	cause named to only send <command>NOTIFY</command> for master
	zones that it loads.
      </note>

    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="dynamic_update">
      <title>Dynamic Update</title>

      <para>
        Dynamic Update is a method for adding, replacing or deleting
        records in a master server by sending it a special form of DNS
        messages.  The format and meaning of these messages is specified
        in RFC 2136.
      </para>

      <para>
        Dynamic update is enabled by
        including an <command>allow-update</command> or
        <command>update-policy</command> clause in the
        <command>zone</command> statement.
      </para>

      <para>
        Updating of secure zones (zones using DNSSEC) follows
        RFC 3007: RRSIG and NSEC records affected by updates are automatically
            regenerated by the server using an online zone key.
        Update authorization is based
        on transaction signatures and an explicit server policy.
      </para>

      <sect2 id="journal">
        <title>The journal file</title>

        <para>
          All changes made to a zone using dynamic update are stored
          in the zone's journal file.  This file is automatically created
          by the server when the first dynamic update takes place.
          The name of the journal file is formed by appending the extension
          <filename>.jnl</filename> to the name of the
          corresponding zone
          file unless specifically overridden.  The journal file is in a
          binary format and should not be edited manually.
        </para>

        <para>
          The server will also occasionally write ("dump")
          the complete contents of the updated zone to its zone file.
          This is not done immediately after
          each dynamic update, because that would be too slow when a large
          zone is updated frequently.  Instead, the dump is delayed by
          up to 15 minutes, allowing additional updates to take place.
        </para>

        <para>
          When a server is restarted after a shutdown or crash, it will replay
              the journal file to incorporate into the zone any updates that
          took
          place after the last zone dump.
        </para>

        <para>
          Changes that result from incoming incremental zone transfers are
          also
          journalled in a similar way.
        </para>

        <para>
          The zone files of dynamic zones cannot normally be edited by
          hand because they are not guaranteed to contain the most recent
          dynamic changes &mdash; those are only in the journal file.
          The only way to ensure that the zone file of a dynamic zone
          is up to date is to run <command>rndc stop</command>.
        </para>

        <para>
          If you have to make changes to a dynamic zone
          manually, the following procedure will work: Disable dynamic updates
              to the zone using
          <command>rndc freeze <replaceable>zone</replaceable></command>.
          This will also remove the zone's <filename>.jnl</filename> file
          and update the master file.  Edit the zone file.  Run
          <command>rndc thaw <replaceable>zone</replaceable></command>
          to reload the changed zone and re-enable dynamic updates.
        </para>

      </sect2>

    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="incremental_zone_transfers">
      <title>Incremental Zone Transfers (IXFR)</title>

      <para>
        The incremental zone transfer (IXFR) protocol is a way for
        slave servers to transfer only changed data, instead of having to
        transfer the entire zone. The IXFR protocol is specified in RFC
        1995. See <xref linkend="proposed_standards"/>.
      </para>

      <para>
        When acting as a master, <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9
        supports IXFR for those zones
        where the necessary change history information is available. These
        include master zones maintained by dynamic update and slave zones
        whose data was obtained by IXFR.  For manually maintained master
        zones, and for slave zones obtained by performing a full zone
        transfer (AXFR), IXFR is supported only if the option
        <command>ixfr-from-differences</command> is set
        to <userinput>yes</userinput>.
      </para>

      <para>
        When acting as a slave, <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 will
        attempt to use IXFR unless
        it is explicitly disabled. For more information about disabling
        IXFR, see the description of the <command>request-ixfr</command> clause
        of the <command>server</command> statement.
      </para>
    </sect1>

    <sect1>
      <title>Split DNS</title>
      <para>
        Setting up different views, or visibility, of the DNS space to
        internal and external resolvers is usually referred to as a
	<emphasis>Split DNS</emphasis> setup. There are several
        reasons an organization would want to set up its DNS this way.
      </para>
      <para>
        One common reason for setting up a DNS system this way is
        to hide "internal" DNS information from "external" clients on the
        Internet. There is some debate as to whether or not this is actually
        useful.
        Internal DNS information leaks out in many ways (via email headers,
        for example) and most savvy "attackers" can find the information
        they need using other means.
	However, since listing addresses of internal servers that
        external clients cannot possibly reach can result in
        connection delays and other annoyances, an organization may
        choose to use a Split DNS to present a consistant view of itself
        to the outside world.
      </para>
      <para>
        Another common reason for setting up a Split DNS system is
        to allow internal networks that are behind filters or in RFC 1918
        space (reserved IP space, as documented in RFC 1918) to resolve DNS
        on the Internet. Split DNS can also be used to allow mail from outside
        back in to the internal network.
      </para>
      <para>
        Here is an example of a split DNS setup:
      </para>
      <para>
        Let's say a company named <emphasis>Example, Inc.</emphasis>
        (<literal>example.com</literal>)
        has several corporate sites that have an internal network with
        reserved
        Internet Protocol (IP) space and an external demilitarized zone (DMZ),
        or "outside" section of a network, that is available to the public.
      </para>
      <para>
        <emphasis>Example, Inc.</emphasis> wants its internal clients
        to be able to resolve external hostnames and to exchange mail with
        people on the outside. The company also wants its internal resolvers
        to have access to certain internal-only zones that are not available
        at all outside of the internal network.
      </para>
      <para>
        In order to accomplish this, the company will set up two sets
        of name servers. One set will be on the inside network (in the
        reserved
        IP space) and the other set will be on bastion hosts, which are
        "proxy"
        hosts that can talk to both sides of its network, in the DMZ.
      </para>
      <para>
        The internal servers will be configured to forward all queries,
        except queries for <filename>site1.internal</filename>, <filename>site2.internal</filename>, <filename>site1.example.com</filename>,
        and <filename>site2.example.com</filename>, to the servers
        in the
        DMZ. These internal servers will have complete sets of information
        for <filename>site1.example.com</filename>, <filename>site2.example.com</filename>,<emphasis/> <filename>site1.internal</filename>,
        and <filename>site2.internal</filename>.
      </para>
      <para>
        To protect the <filename>site1.internal</filename> and <filename>site2.internal</filename> domains,
        the internal name servers must be configured to disallow all queries
        to these domains from any external hosts, including the bastion
        hosts.
      </para>
      <para>
        The external servers, which are on the bastion hosts, will
        be configured to serve the "public" version of the <filename>site1</filename> and <filename>site2.example.com</filename> zones.
        This could include things such as the host records for public servers
        (<filename>www.example.com</filename> and <filename>ftp.example.com</filename>),
        and mail exchange (MX)  records (<filename>a.mx.example.com</filename> and <filename>b.mx.example.com</filename>).
      </para>
      <para>
        In addition, the public <filename>site1</filename> and <filename>site2.example.com</filename> zones
        should have special MX records that contain wildcard (`*') records
        pointing to the bastion hosts. This is needed because external mail
        servers do not have any other way of looking up how to deliver mail
        to those internal hosts. With the wildcard records, the mail will
        be delivered to the bastion host, which can then forward it on to
        internal hosts.
      </para>
      <para>
        Here's an example of a wildcard MX record:
      </para>
      <programlisting>*   IN MX 10 external1.example.com.</programlisting>
      <para>
        Now that they accept mail on behalf of anything in the internal
        network, the bastion hosts will need to know how to deliver mail
        to internal hosts. In order for this to work properly, the resolvers
        on
        the bastion hosts will need to be configured to point to the internal
        name servers for DNS resolution.
      </para>
      <para>
        Queries for internal hostnames will be answered by the internal
        servers, and queries for external hostnames will be forwarded back
        out to the DNS servers on the bastion hosts.
      </para>
      <para>
        In order for all this to work properly, internal clients will
        need to be configured to query <emphasis>only</emphasis> the internal
        name servers for DNS queries. This could also be enforced via
        selective
        filtering on the network.
      </para>
      <para>
        If everything has been set properly, <emphasis>Example, Inc.</emphasis>'s
        internal clients will now be able to:
      </para>
      <itemizedlist>
        <listitem>
          <simpara>
            Look up any hostnames in the <literal>site1</literal>
            and
            <literal>site2.example.com</literal> zones.
          </simpara>
        </listitem>
        <listitem>
          <simpara>
            Look up any hostnames in the <literal>site1.internal</literal> and
            <literal>site2.internal</literal> domains.
          </simpara>
        </listitem>
        <listitem>
          <simpara>Look up any hostnames on the Internet.</simpara>
        </listitem>
        <listitem>
          <simpara>Exchange mail with both internal and external people.</simpara>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
      <para>
        Hosts on the Internet will be able to:
      </para>
      <itemizedlist>
        <listitem>
          <simpara>
            Look up any hostnames in the <literal>site1</literal>
            and
            <literal>site2.example.com</literal> zones.
          </simpara>
        </listitem>
        <listitem>
          <simpara>
            Exchange mail with anyone in the <literal>site1</literal> and
            <literal>site2.example.com</literal> zones.
          </simpara>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

      <para>
        Here is an example configuration for the setup we just
        described above. Note that this is only configuration information;
        for information on how to configure your zone files, see <xref linkend="sample_configuration"/>.
      </para>

      <para>
        Internal DNS server config:
      </para>

<programlisting>

acl internals { 172.16.72.0/24; 192.168.1.0/24; };

acl externals { <varname>bastion-ips-go-here</varname>; };

options {
    ...
    ...
    forward only;
    forwarders {                                // forward to external servers
        <varname>bastion-ips-go-here</varname>;
    };
    allow-transfer { none; };                   // sample allow-transfer (no one)
    allow-query { internals; externals; };      // restrict query access
    allow-recursion { internals; };             // restrict recursion
    ...
    ...
};

zone "site1.example.com" {                      // sample master zone
  type master;
  file "m/site1.example.com";
  forwarders { };                               // do normal iterative
                                                // resolution (do not forward)
  allow-query { internals; externals; };
  allow-transfer { internals; };
};

zone "site2.example.com" {                      // sample slave zone
  type slave;
  file "s/site2.example.com";
  masters { 172.16.72.3; };
  forwarders { };
  allow-query { internals; externals; };
  allow-transfer { internals; };
};

zone "site1.internal" {
  type master;
  file "m/site1.internal";
  forwarders { };
  allow-query { internals; };
  allow-transfer { internals; }
};

zone "site2.internal" {
  type slave;
  file "s/site2.internal";
  masters { 172.16.72.3; };
  forwarders { };
  allow-query { internals };
  allow-transfer { internals; }
};
</programlisting>

      <para>
        External (bastion host) DNS server config:
      </para>

<programlisting>
acl internals { 172.16.72.0/24; 192.168.1.0/24; };

acl externals { bastion-ips-go-here; };

options {
  ...
  ...
  allow-transfer { none; };                     // sample allow-transfer (no one)
  allow-query { any; };                         // default query access
  allow-query-cache { internals; externals; };  // restrict cache access
  allow-recursion { internals; externals; };    // restrict recursion
  ...
  ...
};

zone "site1.example.com" {                      // sample slave zone
  type master;
  file "m/site1.foo.com";
  allow-transfer { internals; externals; };
};

zone "site2.example.com" {
  type slave;
  file "s/site2.foo.com";
  masters { another_bastion_host_maybe; };
  allow-transfer { internals; externals; }
};
</programlisting>

      <para>
        In the <filename>resolv.conf</filename> (or equivalent) on
        the bastion host(s):
      </para>

<programlisting>
search ...
nameserver 172.16.72.2
nameserver 172.16.72.3
nameserver 172.16.72.4
</programlisting>

    </sect1>
    <sect1 id="tsig">
      <title>TSIG</title>
      <para>
        This is a short guide to setting up Transaction SIGnatures
        (TSIG) based transaction security in <acronym>BIND</acronym>. It describes changes
        to the configuration file as well as what changes are required for
        different features, including the process of creating transaction
        keys and using transaction signatures with <acronym>BIND</acronym>.
      </para>
      <para>
        <acronym>BIND</acronym> primarily supports TSIG for server
        to server communication.
        This includes zone transfer, notify, and recursive query messages.
        Resolvers based on newer versions of <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 have limited support
        for TSIG.
      </para>

      <para>
        TSIG can also be useful for dynamic update. A primary
        server for a dynamic zone should control access to the dynamic
        update service, but IP-based access control is insufficient.
        The cryptographic access control provided by TSIG
        is far superior. The <command>nsupdate</command>
        program supports TSIG via the <option>-k</option> and
        <option>-y</option> command line options or inline by use
	of the <command>key</command>.
      </para>

      <sect2>
        <title>Generate Shared Keys for Each Pair of Hosts</title>
        <para>
          A shared secret is generated to be shared between <emphasis>host1</emphasis> and <emphasis>host2</emphasis>.
          An arbitrary key name is chosen: "host1-host2.". The key name must
          be the same on both hosts.
        </para>
        <sect3>
          <title>Automatic Generation</title>
          <para>
            The following command will generate a 128-bit (16 byte) HMAC-MD5
            key as described above. Longer keys are better, but shorter keys
            are easier to read. Note that the maximum key length is 512 bits;
            keys longer than that will be digested with MD5 to produce a
            128-bit key.
          </para>
          <para>
            <userinput>dnssec-keygen -a hmac-md5 -b 128 -n HOST host1-host2.</userinput>
          </para>
          <para>
            The key is in the file <filename>Khost1-host2.+157+00000.private</filename>.
            Nothing directly uses this file, but the base-64 encoded string
            following "<literal>Key:</literal>"
            can be extracted from the file and used as a shared secret:
          </para>
          <programlisting>Key: La/E5CjG9O+os1jq0a2jdA==</programlisting>
          <para>
            The string "<literal>La/E5CjG9O+os1jq0a2jdA==</literal>" can
            be used as the shared secret.
          </para>
        </sect3>
        <sect3>
          <title>Manual Generation</title>
          <para>
            The shared secret is simply a random sequence of bits, encoded
            in base-64. Most ASCII strings are valid base-64 strings (assuming
            the length is a multiple of 4 and only valid characters are used),
            so the shared secret can be manually generated.
          </para>
          <para>
            Also, a known string can be run through <command>mmencode</command> or
            a similar program to generate base-64 encoded data.
          </para>
        </sect3>
      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title>Copying the Shared Secret to Both Machines</title>
        <para>
          This is beyond the scope of DNS. A secure transport mechanism
          should be used. This could be secure FTP, ssh, telephone, etc.
        </para>
      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title>Informing the Servers of the Key's Existence</title>
        <para>
          Imagine <emphasis>host1</emphasis> and <emphasis>host 2</emphasis>
          are
          both servers. The following is added to each server's <filename>named.conf</filename> file:
        </para>

<programlisting>
key host1-host2. {
  algorithm hmac-md5;
  secret "La/E5CjG9O+os1jq0a2jdA==";
};
</programlisting>

        <para>
          The algorithm, hmac-md5, is the only one supported by <acronym>BIND</acronym>.
          The secret is the one generated above. Since this is a secret, it
          is recommended that either <filename>named.conf</filename> be non-world
          readable, or the key directive be added to a non-world readable
          file that is included by
          <filename>named.conf</filename>.
        </para>
        <para>
          At this point, the key is recognized. This means that if the
          server receives a message signed by this key, it can verify the
          signature. If the signature is successfully verified, the
          response is signed by the same key.
        </para>
      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title>Instructing the Server to Use the Key</title>
        <para>
          Since keys are shared between two hosts only, the server must
          be told when keys are to be used. The following is added to the <filename>named.conf</filename> file
          for <emphasis>host1</emphasis>, if the IP address of <emphasis>host2</emphasis> is
          10.1.2.3:
        </para>

<programlisting>
server 10.1.2.3 {
  keys { host1-host2. ;};
};
</programlisting>

        <para>
          Multiple keys may be present, but only the first is used.
          This directive does not contain any secrets, so it may be in a
          world-readable
          file.
        </para>
        <para>
          If <emphasis>host1</emphasis> sends a message that is a request
          to that address, the message will be signed with the specified key. <emphasis>host1</emphasis> will
          expect any responses to signed messages to be signed with the same
          key.
        </para>
        <para>
          A similar statement must be present in <emphasis>host2</emphasis>'s
          configuration file (with <emphasis>host1</emphasis>'s address) for <emphasis>host2</emphasis> to
          sign request messages to <emphasis>host1</emphasis>.
        </para>
      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title>TSIG Key Based Access Control</title>
        <para>
          <acronym>BIND</acronym> allows IP addresses and ranges
          to be specified in ACL
          definitions and
          <command>allow-{ query | transfer | update }</command>
          directives.
          This has been extended to allow TSIG keys also. The above key would
          be denoted <command>key host1-host2.</command>
        </para>
        <para>
          An example of an allow-update directive would be:
        </para>

<programlisting>
allow-update { key host1-host2. ;};
</programlisting>

        <para>
          This allows dynamic updates to succeed only if the request
          was signed by a key named
          "<command>host1-host2.</command>".
        </para>
	<para>
          You may want to read about the more
          powerful <command>update-policy</command> statement in <xref linkend="dynamic_update_policies"/>.
        </para>

      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title>Errors</title>

        <para>
          The processing of TSIG signed messages can result in
          several errors. If a signed message is sent to a non-TSIG aware
          server, a FORMERR (format error) will be returned, since the server will not
          understand the record. This is a result of misconfiguration,
          since the server must be explicitly configured to send a TSIG
          signed message to a specific server.
        </para>

        <para>
          If a TSIG aware server receives a message signed by an
          unknown key, the response will be unsigned with the TSIG
          extended error code set to BADKEY. If a TSIG aware server
          receives a message with a signature that does not validate, the
          response will be unsigned with the TSIG extended error code set
          to BADSIG. If a TSIG aware server receives a message with a time
          outside of the allowed range, the response will be signed with
          the TSIG extended error code set to BADTIME, and the time values
          will be adjusted so that the response can be successfully
          verified. In any of these cases, the message's rcode is set to
          NOTAUTH (not authenticated).
        </para>

      </sect2>
    </sect1>
    <sect1>
      <title>TKEY</title>

      <para><command>TKEY</command>
        is a mechanism for automatically generating a shared secret
        between two hosts.  There are several "modes" of
        <command>TKEY</command> that specify how the key is generated
        or assigned.  <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 implements only one of
        these modes, the Diffie-Hellman key exchange.  Both hosts are
        required to have a Diffie-Hellman KEY record (although this
        record is not required to be present in a zone).  The
        <command>TKEY</command> process must use signed messages,
        signed either by TSIG or SIG(0).  The result of
        <command>TKEY</command> is a shared secret that can be used to
        sign messages with TSIG.  <command>TKEY</command> can also be
        used to delete shared secrets that it had previously
        generated.
      </para>

      <para>
        The <command>TKEY</command> process is initiated by a
        client
        or server by sending a signed <command>TKEY</command>
        query
        (including any appropriate KEYs) to a TKEY-aware server.  The
        server response, if it indicates success, will contain a
        <command>TKEY</command> record and any appropriate keys.
        After
        this exchange, both participants have enough information to
        determine the shared secret; the exact process depends on the
        <command>TKEY</command> mode.  When using the
        Diffie-Hellman
        <command>TKEY</command> mode, Diffie-Hellman keys are
        exchanged,
        and the shared secret is derived by both participants.
      </para>

    </sect1>
    <sect1>
      <title>SIG(0)</title>

      <para>
        <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 partially supports DNSSEC SIG(0)
            transaction signatures as specified in RFC 2535 and RFC2931.
        SIG(0)
        uses public/private keys to authenticate messages.  Access control
        is performed in the same manner as TSIG keys; privileges can be
        granted or denied based on the key name.
      </para>

      <para>
        When a SIG(0) signed message is received, it will only be
        verified if the key is known and trusted by the server; the server
        will not attempt to locate and/or validate the key.
      </para>

      <para>
        SIG(0) signing of multiple-message TCP streams is not
        supported.
      </para>

      <para>
        The only tool shipped with <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 that
        generates SIG(0) signed messages is <command>nsupdate</command>.
      </para>

    </sect1>
    <sect1 id="DNSSEC">
      <title>DNSSEC</title>

      <para>
        Cryptographic authentication of DNS information is possible
        through the DNS Security (<emphasis>DNSSEC-bis</emphasis>) extensions,
        defined in RFC 4033, RFC 4034 and RFC 4035.
	This section describes the creation and use of DNSSEC signed zones.
      </para>

      <para>
        In order to set up a DNSSEC secure zone, there are a series
        of steps which must be followed.  <acronym>BIND</acronym>
        9 ships
        with several tools
        that are used in this process, which are explained in more detail
        below.  In all cases, the <option>-h</option> option prints a
        full list of parameters.  Note that the DNSSEC tools require the
        keyset files to be in the working directory or the
        directory specified by the <option>-d</option> option, and
        that the tools shipped with BIND 9.2.x and earlier are not compatible
        with the current ones.
      </para>

      <para>
        There must also be communication with the administrators of
        the parent and/or child zone to transmit keys.  A zone's security
        status must be indicated by the parent zone for a DNSSEC capable
        resolver to trust its data.  This is done through the presence
        or absence of a <literal>DS</literal> record at the
        delegation
        point.
      </para>

      <para>
        For other servers to trust data in this zone, they must
        either be statically configured with this zone's zone key or the
        zone key of another zone above this one in the DNS tree.
      </para>

      <sect2>
        <title>Generating Keys</title>

        <para>
          The <command>dnssec-keygen</command> program is used to
          generate keys.
        </para>

        <para>
          A secure zone must contain one or more zone keys.  The
          zone keys will sign all other records in the zone, as well as
          the zone keys of any secure delegated zones.  Zone keys must
          have the same name as the zone, a name type of
          <command>ZONE</command>, and must be usable for
          authentication.
          It is recommended that zone keys use a cryptographic algorithm
          designated as "mandatory to implement" by the IETF; currently
          the only one is RSASHA1.
        </para>

        <para>
          The following command will generate a 768-bit RSASHA1 key for
          the <filename>child.example</filename> zone:
        </para>

        <para>
          <userinput>dnssec-keygen -a RSASHA1 -b 768 -n ZONE child.example.</userinput>
        </para>

        <para>
          Two output files will be produced:
          <filename>Kchild.example.+005+12345.key</filename> and
          <filename>Kchild.example.+005+12345.private</filename>
          (where
          12345 is an example of a key tag).  The key file names contain
          the key name (<filename>child.example.</filename>),
          algorithm (3
          is DSA, 1 is RSAMD5, 5 is RSASHA1, etc.), and the key tag (12345 in
          this case).
          The private key (in the <filename>.private</filename>
          file) is
          used to generate signatures, and the public key (in the
          <filename>.key</filename> file) is used for signature
          verification.
        </para>

        <para>
          To generate another key with the same properties (but with
          a different key tag), repeat the above command.
        </para>

        <para>
          The public keys should be inserted into the zone file by
          including the <filename>.key</filename> files using
          <command>$INCLUDE</command> statements.
        </para>

      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title>Signing the Zone</title>

        <para>
          The <command>dnssec-signzone</command> program is used
          to
          sign a zone.
        </para>

        <para>
          Any <filename>keyset</filename> files corresponding
          to secure subzones should be present.  The zone signer will
          generate <literal>NSEC</literal> and <literal>RRSIG</literal>
          records for the zone, as well as <literal>DS</literal>
          for
          the child zones if <literal>'-d'</literal> is specified.
                If <literal>'-d'</literal> is not specified, then
          DS RRsets for
          the secure child zones need to be added manually.
        </para>

        <para>
          The following command signs the zone, assuming it is in a
          file called <filename>zone.child.example</filename>.  By
                default, all zone keys which have an available private key are
                used to generate signatures.
        </para>

        <para>
          <userinput>dnssec-signzone -o child.example zone.child.example</userinput>
        </para>

        <para>
          One output file is produced:
          <filename>zone.child.example.signed</filename>.  This
          file
          should be referenced by <filename>named.conf</filename>
          as the
          input file for the zone.
        </para>

        <para><command>dnssec-signzone</command>
	  will also produce a keyset and dsset files and optionally a
          dlvset file.  These are used to provide the parent zone
          administators with the <literal>DNSKEYs</literal> (or their
          corresponding <literal>DS</literal> records) that are the
          secure entry point to the zone.
        </para>

      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title>Configuring Servers</title>

	<para>
	  To enable <command>named</command> to respond appropriately
	  to DNS requests from DNSSEC aware clients,
	  <command>dnssec-enable</command> must be set to yes.
        </para>

	<para>
	  To enable <command>named</command> to validate answers from
	  other servers both <command>dnssec-enable</command> and
	  <command>dnssec-validate</command> must be set and some
	  <command>trusted-keys</command> must be configured
	  into <filename>named.conf</filename>.
        </para>
	  
	<para>
	  <command>trusted-keys</command> are copies of DNSKEY RRs
	  for zones that are used to form the first link in the
	  cryptographic chain of trust.  All keys listed in
	  <command>trusted-keys</command> (and corresponding zones)
	  are deemed to exist and only the listed keys will be used
	  to validated the DNSKEY RRset that they are from.
	</para>

	<para>
	  <command>trusted-keys</command> are described in more detail
	  later in this document.
	</para>

	<para>
	  Unlike <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8, <acronym>BIND</acronym>
	  9 does not verify signatures on load, so zone keys for
	  authoritative zones do not need to be specified in the
	  configuration file.
	</para>

	<para>
	  After DNSSEC gets established, a typical DNSSEC configuration
	  will look something like the following.  It has a one or
	  more public keys for the root.  This allows answers from
	  outside the organization to be validated.  It will also
	  have several keys for parts of the namespace the organization
	  controls.  These are here to ensure that named is immune
	  to compromises in the DNSSEC components of the security
	  of parent zones.
	</para>

<programlisting>
trusted-keys {

	/* Root Key */
"." 257 3 3 "BNY4wrWM1nCfJ+CXd0rVXyYmobt7sEEfK3clRbGaTwSJxrGkxJWoZu6I7PzJu/
	     E9gx4UC1zGAHlXKdE4zYIpRhaBKnvcC2U9mZhkdUpd1Vso/HAdjNe8LmMlnzY3
	     zy2Xy4klWOADTPzSv9eamj8V18PHGjBLaVtYvk/ln5ZApjYghf+6fElrmLkdaz
	     MQ2OCnACR817DF4BBa7UR/beDHyp5iWTXWSi6XmoJLbG9Scqc7l70KDqlvXR3M
	     /lUUVRbkeg1IPJSidmK3ZyCllh4XSKbje/45SKucHgnwU5jefMtq66gKodQj+M
	     iA21AfUVe7u99WzTLzY3qlxDhxYQQ20FQ97S+LKUTpQcq27R7AT3/V5hRQxScI
	     Nqwcz4jYqZD2fQdgxbcDTClU0CRBdiieyLMNzXG3";

/* Key for our organization's forward zone */
example.com. 257 3 5 "AwEAAaxPMcR2x0HbQV4WeZB6oEDX+r0QM65KbhTjrW1ZaARmPhEZZe
                      3Y9ifgEuq7vZ/zGZUdEGNWy+JZzus0lUptwgjGwhUS1558Hb4JKUbb
	              OTcM8pwXlj0EiX3oDFVmjHO444gLkBO UKUf/mC7HvfwYH/Be22GnC
		      lrinKJp1Og4ywzO9WglMk7jbfW33gUKvirTHr25GL7STQUzBb5Usxt
		      8lgnyTUHs1t3JwCY5hKZ6CqFxmAVZP20igTixin/1LcrgX/KMEGd/b
		      iuvF4qJCyduieHukuY3H4XMAcR+xia2 nIUPvm/oyWR8BW/hWdzOvn
		      SCThlHf3xiYleDbt/o1OTQ09A0=";

/* Key for our reverse zone. */
2.0.192.IN-ADDRPA.NET. 257 3 5 "AQOnS4xn/IgOUpBPJ3bogzwcxOdNax071L18QqZnQQQA
                                VVr+iLhGTnNGp3HoWQLUIzKrJVZ3zggy3WwNT6kZo6c0
				tszYqbtvchmgQC8CzKojM/W16i6MG/ea fGU3siaOdS0
				yOI6BgPsw+YZdzlYMaIJGf4M4dyoKIhzdZyQ2bYQrjyQ
				4LB0lC7aOnsMyYKHHYeRv PxjIQXmdqgOJGq+vsevG06
			        zW+1xgYJh9rCIfnm1GX/KMgxLPG2vXTD/RnLX+D3T3UL
				7HJYHJhAZD5L59VvjSPsZJHeDCUyWYrvPZesZDIRvhDD
				52SKvbheeTJUm6EhkzytNN2SN96QRk8j/iI8ib";
};

options {
	...
	dnssec-enable yes;
	dnssec-validation yes;
};
</programlisting>

	<note>
	  None of the keys listed in this example are valid.  In particular,
	  the root key is not valid.
	</note>

      </sect2>

    </sect1>
    <sect1>
      <title>IPv6 Support in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9</title>

      <para>
        <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 fully supports all currently
        defined forms of IPv6
        name to address and address to name lookups.  It will also use
        IPv6 addresses to make queries when running on an IPv6 capable
        system.
      </para>

      <para>
        For forward lookups, <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 supports
        only AAAA records.  RFC 3363 deprecated the use of A6 records,
        and client-side support for A6 records was accordingly removed
        from <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.
        However, authoritative <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 name servers still
        load zone files containing A6 records correctly, answer queries
        for A6 records, and accept zone transfer for a zone containing A6
        records.
      </para>

      <para>
        For IPv6 reverse lookups, <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 supports
        the traditional "nibble" format used in the
        <emphasis>ip6.arpa</emphasis> domain, as well as the older, deprecated
        <emphasis>ip6.int</emphasis> domain.
        Older versions of <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 
        supported the "binary label" (also known as "bitstring") format,
        but support of binary labels has been completely removed per
        RFC 3363.
        Many applications in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 do not understand
        the binary label format at all any more, and will return an
        error if given.
	In particular, an authoritative <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9
        name server will not load a zone file containing binary labels.
      </para>

      <para>
        For an overview of the format and structure of IPv6 addresses,
        see <xref linkend="ipv6addresses"/>.
      </para>

      <sect2>
        <title>Address Lookups Using AAAA Records</title>

        <para>
          The IPv6 AAAA record is a parallel to the IPv4 A record,
          and, unlike the deprecated A6 record, specifies the entire
          IPv6 address in a single record.  For example,
        </para>

<programlisting>
$ORIGIN example.com.
host            3600    IN      AAAA    2001:db8::1
</programlisting>

        <para>
          Use of IPv4-in-IPv6 mapped addresses is not recommended.
	  If a host has an IPv4 address, use an A record, not
          a AAAA, with <literal>::ffff:192.168.42.1</literal> as
          the address.
        </para>
      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title>Address to Name Lookups Using Nibble Format</title>

        <para>
          When looking up an address in nibble format, the address
          components are simply reversed, just as in IPv4, and
          <literal>ip6.arpa.</literal> is appended to the
          resulting name.
          For example, the following would provide reverse name lookup for
          a host with address
          <literal>2001:db8::1</literal>.
        </para>

<programlisting>
$ORIGIN 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.8.b.d.0.1.0.0.2.ip6.arpa.
1.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0   14400 IN      PTR     host.example.com.
</programlisting>

      </sect2>
    </sect1>
  </chapter>

  <chapter id="Bv9ARM.ch05">
    <title>The <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 Lightweight Resolver</title>
    <sect1>
      <title>The Lightweight Resolver Library</title>
      <para>
        Traditionally applications have been linked with a stub resolver
        library that sends recursive DNS queries to a local caching name
        server.
      </para>
      <para>
        IPv6 once introduced new complexity into the resolution process,
        such as following A6 chains and DNAME records, and simultaneous
        lookup of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.  Though most of the complexity was
        then removed, these are hard or impossible
        to implement in a traditional stub resolver.
      </para>
      <para>
        <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 therefore can also provide resolution
        services to local clients
        using a combination of a lightweight resolver library and a resolver
        daemon process running on the local host.  These communicate using
        a simple UDP-based protocol, the "lightweight resolver protocol"
        that is distinct from and simpler than the full DNS protocol.
      </para>
    </sect1>
    <sect1 id="lwresd">
      <title>Running a Resolver Daemon</title>

      <para>
        To use the lightweight resolver interface, the system must
        run the resolver daemon <command>lwresd</command> or a
        local
        name server configured with a <command>lwres</command>
        statement.
      </para>

      <para>
        By default, applications using the lightweight resolver library will
        make
        UDP requests to the IPv4 loopback address (127.0.0.1) on port 921.
        The
        address can be overridden by <command>lwserver</command>
        lines in
        <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>.
      </para>

      <para>
        The daemon currently only looks in the DNS, but in the future
        it may use other sources such as <filename>/etc/hosts</filename>,
        NIS, etc.
      </para>

      <para>
        The <command>lwresd</command> daemon is essentially a
        caching-only name server that responds to requests using the
        lightweight
        resolver protocol rather than the DNS protocol.  Because it needs
        to run on each host, it is designed to require no or minimal
        configuration.
        Unless configured otherwise, it uses the name servers listed on
        <command>nameserver</command> lines in <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>
        as forwarders, but is also capable of doing the resolution
        autonomously if
        none are specified.
      </para>
      <para>
        The <command>lwresd</command> daemon may also be
        configured with a
        <filename>named.conf</filename> style configuration file,
        in
        <filename>/etc/lwresd.conf</filename> by default.  A name
        server may also
        be configured to act as a lightweight resolver daemon using the
        <command>lwres</command> statement in <filename>named.conf</filename>.
      </para>

    </sect1>
  </chapter>

  <chapter id="Bv9ARM.ch06">
    <title><acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 Configuration Reference</title>

    <para>
      <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 configuration is broadly similar
      to <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8; however, there are a few new
      areas
      of configuration, such as views. <acronym>BIND</acronym>
      8 configuration files should work with few alterations in <acronym>BIND</acronym>
      9, although more complex configurations should be reviewed to check
      if they can be more efficiently implemented using the new features
      found in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.
    </para>

    <para>
      <acronym>BIND</acronym> 4 configuration files can be
      converted to the new format
      using the shell script
      <filename>contrib/named-bootconf/named-bootconf.sh</filename>.
    </para>
    <sect1 id="configuration_file_elements">
      <title>Configuration File Elements</title>
      <para>
        Following is a list of elements used throughout the <acronym>BIND</acronym> configuration
        file documentation:
      </para>
      <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
        <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="2Level-table">
          <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.855in"/>
          <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="3.770in"/>
          <tbody>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>acl_name</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  The name of an <varname>address_match_list</varname> as
                  defined by the <command>acl</command> statement.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>address_match_list</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  A list of one or more
                  <varname>ip_addr</varname>,
                  <varname>ip_prefix</varname>, <varname>key_id</varname>,
                  or <varname>acl_name</varname> elements, see
                  <xref linkend="address_match_lists"/>.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>masters_list</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  A named list of one or more <varname>ip_addr</varname>
		  with optional <varname>key_id</varname> and/or
		  <varname>ip_port</varname>.
		  A <varname>masters_list</varname> may include other
		  <varname>masters_lists</varname>.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>domain_name</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  A quoted string which will be used as
                  a DNS name, for example "<literal>my.test.domain</literal>".
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>dotted_decimal</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  One to four integers valued 0 through
                  255 separated by dots (`.'), such as <command>123</command>,
                  <command>45.67</command> or <command>89.123.45.67</command>.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>ip4_addr</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  An IPv4 address with exactly four elements
                  in <varname>dotted_decimal</varname> notation.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>ip6_addr</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  An IPv6 address, such as <command>2001:db8::1234</command>.
                  IPv6 scoped addresses that have ambiguity on their scope
                  zones must be
                  disambiguated by an appropriate zone ID with the percent
                  character
                  (`%') as delimiter.
                  It is strongly recommended to use string zone names rather
                  than
                  numeric identifiers, in order to be robust against system
                  configuration changes.
                  However, since there is no standard mapping for such names
                  and
                  identifier values, currently only interface names as link
                  identifiers
                  are supported, assuming one-to-one mapping between
                  interfaces and links.
                  For example, a link-local address <command>fe80::1</command> on the
                  link attached to the interface <command>ne0</command>
                  can be specified as <command>fe80::1%ne0</command>.
                  Note that on most systems link-local addresses always have
                  the
                  ambiguity, and need to be disambiguated.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>ip_addr</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  An <varname>ip4_addr</varname> or <varname>ip6_addr</varname>.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>ip_port</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  An IP port <varname>number</varname>.
                  <varname>number</varname> is limited to 0
                  through 65535, with values
                  below 1024 typically restricted to use by processes running
                  as root.
                  In some cases, an asterisk (`*') character can be used as a
                  placeholder to
                  select a random high-numbered port.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>ip_prefix</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  An IP network specified as an <varname>ip_addr</varname>,
                  followed by a slash (`/') and then the number of bits in the
                  netmask.
                  Trailing zeros in a <varname>ip_addr</varname>
                  may omitted.
                  For example, <command>127/8</command> is the
                  network <command>127.0.0.0</command> with
                  netmask <command>255.0.0.0</command> and <command>1.2.3.0/28</command> is
                  network <command>1.2.3.0</command> with netmask <command>255.255.255.240</command>.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>key_id</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  A <varname>domain_name</varname> representing
                  the name of a shared key, to be used for transaction
                  security.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>key_list</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  A list of one or more
                  <varname>key_id</varname>s,
                  separated by semicolons and ending with a semicolon.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>number</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  A non-negative 32-bit integer
                  (i.e., a number between 0 and 4294967295, inclusive).
                  Its acceptable value might further
                  be limited by the context in which it is used.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>path_name</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  A quoted string which will be used as
                  a pathname, such as <filename>zones/master/my.test.domain</filename>.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>size_spec</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  A number, the word <userinput>unlimited</userinput>,
                  or the word <userinput>default</userinput>.
                </para>
		<para>
                  An <varname>unlimited</varname> <varname>size_spec</varname> requests unlimited
                  use, or the maximum available amount. A <varname>default size_spec</varname> uses
                  the limit that was in force when the server was started.
                </para>
                <para>
                  A <varname>number</varname> can optionally be
		  followed by a scaling factor:
		  <userinput>K</userinput> or <userinput>k</userinput>
		  for kilobytes,
		  <userinput>M</userinput> or <userinput>m</userinput>
		  for megabytes, and
		  <userinput>G</userinput> or <userinput>g</userinput> for gigabytes,
                  which scale by 1024, 1024*1024, and 1024*1024*1024
                  respectively.
                </para>
                <para>
                  The value must be representable as a 64-bit unsigned integer
                  (0 to 18446744073709551615, inclusive).
                  Using <varname>unlimited</varname> is the best
                  way
                  to safely set a really large number.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>yes_or_no</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  Either <userinput>yes</userinput> or <userinput>no</userinput>.
                  The words <userinput>true</userinput> and <userinput>false</userinput> are
                  also accepted, as are the numbers <userinput>1</userinput>
                  and <userinput>0</userinput>.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para>
                  <varname>dialup_option</varname>
                </para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  One of <userinput>yes</userinput>,
                  <userinput>no</userinput>, <userinput>notify</userinput>,
                  <userinput>notify-passive</userinput>, <userinput>refresh</userinput> or
                  <userinput>passive</userinput>.
                  When used in a zone, <userinput>notify-passive</userinput>,
                  <userinput>refresh</userinput>, and <userinput>passive</userinput>
                  are restricted to slave and stub zones.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
          </tbody>
        </tgroup>
      </informaltable>
      <sect2 id="address_match_lists">
        <title>Address Match Lists</title>
        <sect3>
          <title>Syntax</title>

<programlisting><varname>address_match_list</varname> = address_match_list_element ;
  <optional> address_match_list_element; ... </optional>
<varname>address_match_list_element</varname> = <optional> ! </optional> (ip_address <optional>/length</optional> |
   key key_id | acl_name | { address_match_list } )
</programlisting>

        </sect3>
        <sect3>
          <title>Definition and Usage</title>
          <para>
            Address match lists are primarily used to determine access
            control for various server operations. They are also used in
            the <command>listen-on</command> and <command>sortlist</command>
            statements. The elements
            which constitute an address match list can be any of the
            following:
          </para>
          <itemizedlist>
            <listitem>
              <simpara>an IP address (IPv4 or IPv6)</simpara>
            </listitem>
            <listitem>
              <simpara>an IP prefix (in `/' notation)</simpara>
            </listitem>
            <listitem>
              <simpara>
                a key ID, as defined by the <command>key</command>
                statement
              </simpara>
            </listitem>
            <listitem>
              <simpara>the name of an address match list defined with
                the <command>acl</command> statement
              </simpara>
            </listitem>
            <listitem>
              <simpara>a nested address match list enclosed in braces</simpara>
            </listitem>
          </itemizedlist>

          <para>
            Elements can be negated with a leading exclamation mark (`!'),
            and the match list names "any", "none", "localhost", and
            "localnets"
            are predefined. More information on those names can be found in
            the description of the acl statement.
          </para>

          <para>
            The addition of the key clause made the name of this syntactic
            element something of a misnomer, since security keys can be used
            to validate access without regard to a host or network address.
            Nonetheless,
            the term "address match list" is still used throughout the
            documentation.
          </para>

          <para>
            When a given IP address or prefix is compared to an address
            match list, the list is traversed in order until an element
            matches.
            The interpretation of a match depends on whether the list is being
            used
            for access control, defining listen-on ports, or in a sortlist,
            and whether the element was negated.
          </para>

	  <para>
	    When used as an access control list, a non-negated match
	    allows access and a negated match denies access. If
	    there is no match, access is denied. The clauses
	    <command>allow-notify</command>,
	    <command>allow-query</command>,
	    <command>allow-query-cache</command>,
	    <command>allow-transfer</command>,
	    <command>allow-update</command>,
	    <command>allow-update-forwarding</command>, and
	    <command>blackhole</command> all use address match
	    lists.  Similarly, the listen-on option will cause the
	    server to not accept queries on any of the machine's
	    addresses which do not match the list.
	  </para>

          <para>
            Because of the first-match aspect of the algorithm, an element
            that defines a subset of another element in the list should come
            before the broader element, regardless of whether either is
            negated. For
            example, in
            <command>1.2.3/24; ! 1.2.3.13;</command> the 1.2.3.13
            element is
            completely useless because the algorithm will match any lookup for
            1.2.3.13 to the 1.2.3/24 element.
            Using <command>! 1.2.3.13; 1.2.3/24</command> fixes
            that problem by having 1.2.3.13 blocked by the negation but all
            other 1.2.3.* hosts fall through.
          </para>
        </sect3>
      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title>Comment Syntax</title>

        <para>
          The <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 comment syntax allows for
          comments to appear
          anywhere that white space may appear in a <acronym>BIND</acronym> configuration
          file. To appeal to programmers of all kinds, they can be written
          in the C, C++, or shell/perl style.
        </para>

        <sect3>
          <title>Syntax</title>

          <para>
            <programlisting>/* This is a <acronym>BIND</acronym> comment as in C */</programlisting>
            <programlisting>// This is a <acronym>BIND</acronym> comment as in C++</programlisting>
            <programlisting># This is a <acronym>BIND</acronym> comment as in common UNIX shells and perl</programlisting>
          </para>
        </sect3>
        <sect3>
          <title>Definition and Usage</title>
          <para>
            Comments may appear anywhere that white space may appear in
            a <acronym>BIND</acronym> configuration file.
          </para>
          <para>
            C-style comments start with the two characters /* (slash,
            star) and end with */ (star, slash). Because they are completely
            delimited with these characters, they can be used to comment only
            a portion of a line or to span multiple lines.
          </para>
          <para>
            C-style comments cannot be nested. For example, the following
            is not valid because the entire comment ends with the first */:
          </para>
          <para>

<programlisting>/* This is the start of a comment.
   This is still part of the comment.
/* This is an incorrect attempt at nesting a comment. */
   This is no longer in any comment. */
</programlisting>

          </para>

          <para>
            C++-style comments start with the two characters // (slash,
            slash) and continue to the end of the physical line. They cannot
            be continued across multiple physical lines; to have one logical
            comment span multiple lines, each line must use the // pair.
          </para>
          <para>
            For example:
          </para>
          <para>

<programlisting>// This is the start of a comment.  The next line
// is a new comment, even though it is logically
// part of the previous comment.
</programlisting>

          </para>
          <para>
            Shell-style (or perl-style, if you prefer) comments start
            with the character <literal>#</literal> (number sign)
            and continue to the end of the
            physical line, as in C++ comments.
          </para>
          <para>
            For example:
          </para>

          <para>

<programlisting># This is the start of a comment.  The next line
# is a new comment, even though it is logically
# part of the previous comment.
</programlisting>

          </para>

          <warning>
            <para>
              You cannot use the semicolon (`;') character
              to start a comment such as you would in a zone file. The
              semicolon indicates the end of a configuration
              statement.
            </para>
          </warning>
        </sect3>
      </sect2>
    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="Configuration_File_Grammar">
      <title>Configuration File Grammar</title>

      <para>
        A <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 configuration consists of
        statements and comments.
        Statements end with a semicolon. Statements and comments are the
        only elements that can appear without enclosing braces. Many
        statements contain a block of sub-statements, which are also
        terminated with a semicolon.
      </para>

      <para>
        The following statements are supported:
      </para>

      <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
        <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="2Level-table">
          <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.336in"/>
          <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="3.778in"/>
          <tbody>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>acl</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  defines a named IP address
                  matching list, for access control and other uses.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>controls</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  declares control channels to be used
                  by the <command>rndc</command> utility.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>include</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  includes a file.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>key</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  specifies key information for use in
                  authentication and authorization using TSIG.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>logging</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  specifies what the server logs, and where
                  the log messages are sent.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>lwres</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  configures <command>named</command> to
                  also act as a light-weight resolver daemon (<command>lwresd</command>).
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>masters</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  defines a named masters list for
                  inclusion in stub and slave zone masters clauses.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>options</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  controls global server configuration
                  options and sets defaults for other statements.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>server</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  sets certain configuration options on
                  a per-server basis.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>trusted-keys</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  defines trusted DNSSEC keys.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>view</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  defines a view.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
            <row rowsep="0">
              <entry colname="1">
                <para><command>zone</command></para>
              </entry>
              <entry colname="2">
                <para>
                  defines a zone.
                </para>
              </entry>
            </row>
          </tbody>
        </tgroup>
      </informaltable>

      <para>
        The <command>logging</command> and
        <command>options</command> statements may only occur once
        per
        configuration.
      </para>

      <sect2>
        <title><command>acl</command> Statement Grammar</title>

<programlisting><command>acl</command> acl-name {
    address_match_list
};
</programlisting>

      </sect2>
      <sect2 id="acl">
        <title><command>acl</command> Statement Definition and
          Usage</title>

        <para>
          The <command>acl</command> statement assigns a symbolic
          name to an address match list. It gets its name from a primary
          use of address match lists: Access Control Lists (ACLs).
        </para>

        <para>
          Note that an address match list's name must be defined
          with <command>acl</command> before it can be used
          elsewhere; no
          forward references are allowed.
        </para>

        <para>
          The following ACLs are built-in:
        </para>

        <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
          <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="3Level-table">
            <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.130in"/>
            <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="4.000in"/>
            <tbody>
              <row rowsep="0">
                <entry colname="1">
                  <para><command>any</command></para>
                </entry>
                <entry colname="2">
                  <para>
                    Matches all hosts.
                  </para>
                </entry>
              </row>
              <row rowsep="0">
                <entry colname="1">
                  <para><command>none</command></para>
                </entry>
                <entry colname="2">
                  <para>
                    Matches no hosts.
                  </para>
                </entry>
              </row>
              <row rowsep="0">
                <entry colname="1">
                  <para><command>localhost</command></para>
                </entry>
                <entry colname="2">
                  <para>
                    Matches the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses of all network
                    interfaces on the system.
                  </para>
                </entry>
              </row>
              <row rowsep="0">
                <entry colname="1">
                  <para><command>localnets</command></para>
                </entry>
                <entry colname="2">
                  <para>
                    Matches any host on an IPv4 or IPv6 network
                    for which the system has an interface.
                    Some systems do not provide a way to determine the prefix
                    lengths of
                    local IPv6 addresses.
                    In such a case, <command>localnets</command>
                    only matches the local
                    IPv6 addresses, just like <command>localhost</command>.
                  </para>
                </entry>
              </row>
            </tbody>
          </tgroup>
        </informaltable>

      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title><command>controls</command> Statement Grammar</title>

<programlisting><command>controls</command> {
   [ inet ( ip_addr | * ) [ port ip_port ] allow { <replaceable> address_match_list </replaceable> }
                keys { <replaceable>key_list</replaceable> }; ]
   [ inet ...; ]
   [ unix <replaceable>path</replaceable> perm <replaceable>number</replaceable> owner <replaceable>number</replaceable> group <replaceable>number</replaceable> keys { <replaceable>key_list</replaceable> }; ]
   [ unix ...; ]
};
</programlisting>

      </sect2>

      <sect2 id="controls_statement_definition_and_usage">
        <title><command>controls</command> Statement Definition and
          Usage</title>

        <para>
          The <command>controls</command> statement declares control
          channels to be used by system administrators to control the
          operation of the name server. These control channels are
          used by the <command>rndc</command> utility to send
          commands to and retrieve non-DNS results from a name server.
        </para>

        <para>
          An <command>inet</command> control channel is a TCP socket
	  listening at the specified <command>ip_port</command> on the
	  specified <command>ip_addr</command>, which can be an IPv4 or IPv6
	  address.  An <command>ip_addr</command> of <literal>*</literal> (asterisk) is
	  interpreted as the IPv4 wildcard address; connections will be
	  accepted on any of the system's IPv4 addresses.
	  To listen on the IPv6 wildcard address,
          use an <command>ip_addr</command> of <literal>::</literal>.
          If you will only use <command>rndc</command> on the local host,
          using the loopback address (<literal>127.0.0.1</literal>
          or <literal>::1</literal>) is recommended for maximum security.
        </para>

        <para>
          If no port is specified, port 953 is used. The asterisk
	  "<literal>*</literal>" cannot be used for <command>ip_port</command>.
        </para>

        <para>
          The ability to issue commands over the control channel is
          restricted by the <command>allow</command> and
          <command>keys</command> clauses.
	  Connections to the control channel are permitted based on the
          <command>address_match_list</command>.  This is for simple
          IP address based filtering only; any <command>key_id</command>
          elements of the <command>address_match_list</command>
          are ignored.
        </para>

	<para>
	  A <command>unix</command> control channel is a UNIX domain
	  socket listening at the specified path in the file system.
	  Access to the socket is specified by the <command>perm</command>,
	  <command>owner</command> and <command>group</command> clauses.
	  Note on some platforms (SunOS and Solaris) the permissions
	  (<command>perm</command>) are applied to the parent directory
	  as the permissions on the socket itself are ignored.
	</para>

        <para>
          The primary authorization mechanism of the command
          channel is the <command>key_list</command>, which
          contains a list of <command>key_id</command>s.
          Each <command>key_id</command> in the <command>key_list</command>
	  is authorized to execute commands over the control channel.
          See <xref linkend="rndc"/> in <xref linkend="admin_tools"/>)
	  for information about configuring keys in <command>rndc</command>.
        </para>

        <para>
          If no <command>controls</command> statement is present,
          <command>named</command> will set up a default
          control channel listening on the loopback address 127.0.0.1
          and its IPv6 counterpart ::1.
          In this case, and also when the <command>controls</command> statement
          is present but does not have a <command>keys</command> clause,
          <command>named</command> will attempt to load the command channel key
          from the file <filename>rndc.key</filename> in
          <filename>/etc</filename> (or whatever <varname>sysconfdir</varname>
          was specified as when <acronym>BIND</acronym> was built).
          To create a <filename>rndc.key</filename> file, run
          <userinput>rndc-confgen -a</userinput>.
        </para>

        <para>
          The <filename>rndc.key</filename> feature was created to
          ease the transition of systems from <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8,
          which did not have digital signatures on its command channel
          messages and thus did not have a <command>keys</command> clause.

          It makes it possible to use an existing <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8
          configuration file in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 unchanged,
          and still have <command>rndc</command> work the same way
          <command>ndc</command> worked in BIND 8, simply by executing the
          command <userinput>rndc-confgen -a</userinput> after BIND 9 is
          installed.
        </para>

        <para>
          Since the <filename>rndc.key</filename> feature
          is only intended to allow the backward-compatible usage of
          <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 configuration files, this
          feature does not
          have a high degree of configurability.  You cannot easily change
          the key name or the size of the secret, so you should make a
          <filename>rndc.conf</filename> with your own key if you
          wish to change
          those things.  The <filename>rndc.key</filename> file
          also has its
          permissions set such that only the owner of the file (the user that
          <command>named</command> is running as) can access it.
          If you
          desire greater flexibility in allowing other users to access
          <command>rndc</command> commands, then you need to create
          a
          <filename>rndc.conf</filename> file and make it group
          readable by a group
          that contains the users who should have access.
        </para>

        <para>
          To disable the command channel, use an empty
	  <command>controls</command> statement:
	  <command>controls { };</command>.
        </para>

      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title><command>include</command> Statement Grammar</title>
        <programlisting>include <replaceable>filename</replaceable>;</programlisting>
      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title><command>include</command> Statement Definition and
          Usage</title>

        <para>
          The <command>include</command> statement inserts the
          specified file at the point where the <command>include</command>
          statement is encountered. The <command>include</command>
                statement facilitates the administration of configuration
          files
          by permitting the reading or writing of some things but not
          others. For example, the statement could include private keys
          that are readable only by the name server.
        </para>

      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title><command>key</command> Statement Grammar</title>

<programlisting>key <replaceable>key_id</replaceable> {
    algorithm <replaceable>string</replaceable>;
    secret <replaceable>string</replaceable>;
};
</programlisting>

      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title><command>key</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>

        <para>
          The <command>key</command> statement defines a shared
          secret key for use with TSIG (see <xref linkend="tsig"/>)
          or the command channel
          (see <xref linkend="controls_statement_definition_and_usage"/>).
        </para>

        <para>
          The <command>key</command> statement can occur at the
          top level
          of the configuration file or inside a <command>view</command>
          statement.  Keys defined in top-level <command>key</command>
          statements can be used in all views.  Keys intended for use in
          a <command>controls</command> statement
          (see <xref linkend="controls_statement_definition_and_usage"/>)
          must be defined at the top level.
        </para>

        <para>
          The <replaceable>key_id</replaceable>, also known as the
          key name, is a domain name uniquely identifying the key. It can
          be used in a <command>server</command>
          statement to cause requests sent to that
          server to be signed with this key, or in address match lists to
          verify that incoming requests have been signed with a key
          matching this name, algorithm, and secret.
        </para>

	<para>
	  The <replaceable>algorithm_id</replaceable> is a string
	  that specifies a security/authentication algorithm.  Named
	  supports <literal>hmac-md5</literal>,
	  <literal>hmac-sha1</literal>, <literal>hmac-sha224</literal>,
	  <literal>hmac-sha256</literal>, <literal>hmac-sha384</literal>
	  and <literal>hmac-sha512</literal> TSIG authentication.
	  Truncated hashes are supported by appending the minimum
	  number of required bits preceeded by a dash, e.g.
	  <literal>hmac-sha1-80</literal>.  The
	  <replaceable>secret_string</replaceable> is the secret
	  to be used by the algorithm, and is treated as a base-64
	  encoded string.
	</para>

      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title><command>logging</command> Statement Grammar</title>

<programlisting><command>logging</command> {
   [ <command>channel</command> <replaceable>channel_name</replaceable> {
     ( <command>file</command> <replaceable>path name</replaceable>
         [ <command>versions</command> ( <replaceable>number</replaceable> | <command>unlimited</command> ) ]
         [ <command>size</command> <replaceable>size spec</replaceable> ]
       | <command>syslog</command> <replaceable>syslog_facility</replaceable>
       | <command>stderr</command>
       | <command>null</command> );
     [ <command>severity</command> (<option>critical</option> | <option>error</option> | <option>warning</option> | <option>notice</option> |
                 <option>info</option> | <option>debug</option> [ <replaceable>level</replaceable> ] | <option>dynamic</option> ); ]
     [ <command>print-category</command> <option>yes</option> or <option>no</option>; ]
     [ <command>print-severity</command> <option>yes</option> or <option>no</option>; ]
     [ <command>print-time</command> <option>yes</option> or <option>no</option>; ]
   }; ]
   [ <command>category</command> <replaceable>category_name</replaceable> {
     <replaceable>channel_name</replaceable> ; [ <replaceable>channel_name</replaceable> ; ... ]
   }; ]
   ...
};
</programlisting>

      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title><command>logging</command> Statement Definition and
          Usage</title>

        <para>
          The <command>logging</command> statement configures a
          wide
          variety of logging options for the name server. Its <command>channel</command> phrase
          associates output methods, format options and severity levels with
          a name that can then be used with the <command>category</command> phrase
          to select how various classes of messages are logged.
        </para>
        <para>
          Only one <command>logging</command> statement is used to
          define
          as many channels and categories as are wanted. If there is no <command>logging</command> statement,
          the logging configuration will be:
        </para>

<programlisting>logging {
     category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
     category unmatched { null; };
};
</programlisting>

        <para>
          In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, the logging configuration
          is only established when
          the entire configuration file has been parsed.  In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8, it was
          established as soon as the <command>logging</command>
          statement
          was parsed. When the server is starting up, all logging messages
          regarding syntax errors in the configuration file go to the default
          channels, or to standard error if the "<option>-g</option>" option
          was specified.
        </para>

        <sect3>
          <title>The <command>channel</command> Phrase</title>

          <para>
            All log output goes to one or more <emphasis>channels</emphasis>;
            you can make as many of them as you want.
          </para>

          <para>
            Every channel definition must include a destination clause that
            says whether messages selected for the channel go to a file, to a
            particular syslog facility, to the standard error stream, or are
            discarded. It can optionally also limit the message severity level
            that will be accepted by the channel (the default is
            <command>info</command>), and whether to include a
            <command>named</command>-generated time stamp, the
            category name
            and/or severity level (the default is not to include any).
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>null</command> destination clause
            causes all messages sent to the channel to be discarded;
            in that case, other options for the channel are meaningless.
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>file</command> destination clause directs
            the channel
            to a disk file.  It can include limitations
            both on how large the file is allowed to become, and how many
            versions
            of the file will be saved each time the file is opened.
          </para>

          <para>
            If you use the <command>versions</command> log file
            option, then
            <command>named</command> will retain that many backup
            versions of the file by
            renaming them when opening.  For example, if you choose to keep
            three old versions
            of the file <filename>lamers.log</filename>, then just
            before it is opened
            <filename>lamers.log.1</filename> is renamed to
            <filename>lamers.log.2</filename>, <filename>lamers.log.0</filename> is renamed
            to <filename>lamers.log.1</filename>, and <filename>lamers.log</filename> is
            renamed to <filename>lamers.log.0</filename>.
            You can say <command>versions unlimited</command> to
            not limit
            the number of versions.
            If a <command>size</command> option is associated with
            the log file,
            then renaming is only done when the file being opened exceeds the
            indicated size.  No backup versions are kept by default; any
            existing
            log file is simply appended.
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>size</command> option for files is used
            to limit log
            growth. If the file ever exceeds the size, then <command>named</command> will
            stop writing to the file unless it has a <command>versions</command> option
            associated with it.  If backup versions are kept, the files are
            rolled as
            described above and a new one begun.  If there is no
            <command>versions</command> option, no more data will
            be written to the log
            until some out-of-band mechanism removes or truncates the log to
            less than the
            maximum size.  The default behavior is not to limit the size of
            the
            file.
          </para>

          <para>
            Example usage of the <command>size</command> and
            <command>versions</command> options:
          </para>

<programlisting>channel an_example_channel {
    file "example.log" versions 3 size 20m;
    print-time yes;
    print-category yes;
};
</programlisting>

          <para>
            The <command>syslog</command> destination clause
            directs the
            channel to the system log.  Its argument is a
            syslog facility as described in the <command>syslog</command> man
            page. Known facilities are <command>kern</command>, <command>user</command>,
            <command>mail</command>, <command>daemon</command>, <command>auth</command>,
            <command>syslog</command>, <command>lpr</command>, <command>news</command>,
            <command>uucp</command>, <command>cron</command>, <command>authpriv</command>,
            <command>ftp</command>, <command>local0</command>, <command>local1</command>,
            <command>local2</command>, <command>local3</command>, <command>local4</command>,
            <command>local5</command>, <command>local6</command> and
            <command>local7</command>, however not all facilities
            are supported on
            all operating systems.
            How <command>syslog</command> will handle messages
            sent to
            this facility is described in the <command>syslog.conf</command> man
            page. If you have a system which uses a very old version of <command>syslog</command> that
            only uses two arguments to the <command>openlog()</command> function,
            then this clause is silently ignored.
          </para>
          <para>
            The <command>severity</command> clause works like <command>syslog</command>'s
            "priorities", except that they can also be used if you are writing
            straight to a file rather than using <command>syslog</command>.
            Messages which are not at least of the severity level given will
            not be selected for the channel; messages of higher severity
            levels
            will be accepted.
          </para>
          <para>
            If you are using <command>syslog</command>, then the <command>syslog.conf</command> priorities
            will also determine what eventually passes through. For example,
            defining a channel facility and severity as <command>daemon</command> and <command>debug</command> but
            only logging <command>daemon.warning</command> via <command>syslog.conf</command> will
            cause messages of severity <command>info</command> and
            <command>notice</command> to
            be dropped. If the situation were reversed, with <command>named</command> writing
            messages of only <command>warning</command> or higher,
            then <command>syslogd</command> would
            print all messages it received from the channel.
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>stderr</command> destination clause
            directs the
            channel to the server's standard error stream.  This is intended
            for
            use when the server is running as a foreground process, for
            example
            when debugging a configuration.
          </para>

          <para>
            The server can supply extensive debugging information when
            it is in debugging mode. If the server's global debug level is
            greater
            than zero, then debugging mode will be active. The global debug
            level is set either by starting the <command>named</command> server
            with the <option>-d</option> flag followed by a positive integer,
            or by running <command>rndc trace</command>.
            The global debug level
            can be set to zero, and debugging mode turned off, by running <command>rndc
notrace</command>. All debugging messages in the server have a debug
            level, and higher debug levels give more detailed output. Channels
            that specify a specific debug severity, for example:
          </para>

<programlisting>channel specific_debug_level {
    file "foo";
    severity debug 3;
};
</programlisting>

          <para>
            will get debugging output of level 3 or less any time the
            server is in debugging mode, regardless of the global debugging
            level. Channels with <command>dynamic</command>
            severity use the
            server's global debug level to determine what messages to print.
          </para>
          <para>
            If <command>print-time</command> has been turned on,
            then
            the date and time will be logged. <command>print-time</command> may
            be specified for a <command>syslog</command> channel,
            but is usually
            pointless since <command>syslog</command> also prints
            the date and
            time. If <command>print-category</command> is
            requested, then the
            category of the message will be logged as well. Finally, if <command>print-severity</command> is
            on, then the severity level of the message will be logged. The <command>print-</command> options may
            be used in any combination, and will always be printed in the
            following
            order: time, category, severity. Here is an example where all
            three <command>print-</command> options
            are on:
          </para>

          <para>
            <computeroutput>28-Feb-2000 15:05:32.863 general: notice: running</computeroutput>
          </para>

          <para>
            There are four predefined channels that are used for
            <command>named</command>'s default logging as follows.
            How they are
            used is described in <xref linkend="the_category_phrase"/>.
          </para>

<programlisting>channel default_syslog {
    syslog daemon;                      // send to syslog's daemon
                                        // facility
    severity info;                      // only send priority info
                                        // and higher
};

channel default_debug {
    file "named.run";                   // write to named.run in
                                        // the working directory
                                        // Note: stderr is used instead
                                        // of "named.run"
                                        // if the server is started
                                        // with the '-f' option.
    severity dynamic;                   // log at the server's
                                        // current debug level
};

channel default_stderr {
    stderr;                             // writes to stderr
    severity info;                      // only send priority info
                                        // and higher
};

channel null {
   null;                                // toss anything sent to
                                        // this channel
};
</programlisting>

          <para>
            The <command>default_debug</command> channel has the
            special
            property that it only produces output when the server's debug
            level is
            nonzero.  It normally writes to a file called <filename>named.run</filename>
            in the server's working directory.
          </para>

          <para>
            For security reasons, when the "<option>-u</option>"
            command line option is used, the <filename>named.run</filename> file
            is created only after <command>named</command> has
            changed to the
            new UID, and any debug output generated while <command>named</command> is
            starting up and still running as root is discarded.  If you need
            to capture this output, you must run the server with the "<option>-g</option>"
            option and redirect standard error to a file.
          </para>

          <para>
            Once a channel is defined, it cannot be redefined. Thus you
            cannot alter the built-in channels directly, but you can modify
            the default logging by pointing categories at channels you have
            defined.
          </para>
        </sect3>

        <sect3 id="the_category_phrase">
          <title>The <command>category</command> Phrase</title>

          <para>
            There are many categories, so you can send the logs you want
            to see wherever you want, without seeing logs you don't want. If
            you don't specify a list of channels for a category, then log
            messages
            in that category will be sent to the <command>default</command> category
            instead. If you don't specify a default category, the following
            "default default" is used:
          </para>

<programlisting>category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
</programlisting>

          <para>
            As an example, let's say you want to log security events to
            a file, but you also want keep the default logging behavior. You'd
            specify the following:
          </para>

<programlisting>channel my_security_channel {
    file "my_security_file";
    severity info;
};
category security {
    my_security_channel;
    default_syslog;
    default_debug;
};</programlisting>

          <para>
            To discard all messages in a category, specify the <command>null</command> channel:
          </para>

<programlisting>category xfer-out { null; };
category notify { null; };
</programlisting>

          <para>
            Following are the available categories and brief descriptions
            of the types of log information they contain. More
            categories may be added in future <acronym>BIND</acronym> releases.
          </para>
          <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="4Level-table">
              <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.150in"/>
              <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="3.350in"/>
              <tbody>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>default</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      The default category defines the logging
                      options for those categories where no specific
                      configuration has been
                      defined.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>general</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      The catch-all. Many things still aren't
                      classified into categories, and they all end up here.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>database</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Messages relating to the databases used
                      internally by the name server to store zone and cache
                      data.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>security</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Approval and denial of requests.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>config</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Configuration file parsing and processing.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>resolver</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      DNS resolution, such as the recursive
                      lookups performed on behalf of clients by a caching name
                      server.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>xfer-in</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Zone transfers the server is receiving.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>xfer-out</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Zone transfers the server is sending.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>notify</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      The NOTIFY protocol.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>client</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Processing of client requests.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>unmatched</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Messages that named was unable to determine the
                      class of or for which there was no matching <command>view</command>.
                      A one line summary is also logged to the <command>client</command> category.
                      This category is best sent to a file or stderr, by
                      default it is sent to
                      the <command>null</command> channel.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>network</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Network operations.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>update</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Dynamic updates.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>update-security</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Approval and denial of update requests.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>queries</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Specify where queries should be logged to.
                    </para>
                    <para>
                      At startup, specifying the category <command>queries</command> will also
                      enable query logging unless <command>querylog</command> option has been
                      specified.
                    </para>
                    <para>
                      The query log entry reports the client's IP address and
                      port number, and the
                      query name, class and type.  It also reports whether the
                      Recursion Desired
                      flag was set (+ if set, - if not set), EDNS was in use
                      (E) or if the
                      query was signed (S).
                    </para>
                    <para>
                      <computeroutput>client 127.0.0.1#62536: query: www.example.com IN AAAA +SE</computeroutput>
                    </para>
                    <para>
                      <computeroutput>client ::1#62537: query: www.example.net IN AAAA -SE</computeroutput>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>dispatch</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Dispatching of incoming packets to the
                      server modules where they are to be processed.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>dnssec</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      DNSSEC and TSIG protocol processing.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>lame-servers</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Lame servers.  These are misconfigurations
                      in remote servers, discovered by BIND 9 when trying to
                      query
                      those servers during resolution.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>delegation-only</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Delegation only.  Logs queries that have have
                      been forced to NXDOMAIN as the result of a
                      delegation-only zone or
                      a <command>delegation-only</command> in a
                      hint or stub zone declaration.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
              </tbody>
            </tgroup>
          </informaltable>
        </sect3>
      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title><command>lwres</command> Statement Grammar</title>

        <para>
           This is the grammar of the <command>lwres</command>
          statement in the <filename>named.conf</filename> file:
        </para>

<programlisting><command>lwres</command> {
    <optional> listen-on { <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> view <replaceable>view_name</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> search { <replaceable>domain_name</replaceable> ; <optional> <replaceable>domain_name</replaceable> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> ndots <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
};
</programlisting>

      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title><command>lwres</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>

        <para>
          The <command>lwres</command> statement configures the
          name
          server to also act as a lightweight resolver server. (See
          <xref linkend="lwresd"/>.)  There may be be multiple
          <command>lwres</command> statements configuring
          lightweight resolver servers with different properties.
        </para>

        <para>
          The <command>listen-on</command> statement specifies a
          list of
          addresses (and ports) that this instance of a lightweight resolver
          daemon
          should accept requests on.  If no port is specified, port 921 is
          used.
          If this statement is omitted, requests will be accepted on
          127.0.0.1,
          port 921.
        </para>

        <para>
          The <command>view</command> statement binds this
          instance of a
          lightweight resolver daemon to a view in the DNS namespace, so that
          the
          response will be constructed in the same manner as a normal DNS
          query
          matching this view.  If this statement is omitted, the default view
          is
          used, and if there is no default view, an error is triggered.
        </para>

        <para>
          The <command>search</command> statement is equivalent to
          the
          <command>search</command> statement in
          <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>.  It provides a
          list of domains
          which are appended to relative names in queries.
        </para>

        <para>
          The <command>ndots</command> statement is equivalent to
          the
          <command>ndots</command> statement in
          <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>.  It indicates the
          minimum
          number of dots in a relative domain name that should result in an
          exact match lookup before search path elements are appended.
        </para>
      </sect2>
      <sect2>
        <title><command>masters</command> Statement Grammar</title>

<programlisting>
<command>masters</command> <replaceable>name</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> { ( <replaceable>masters_list</replaceable> | <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> <optional>key <replaceable>key</replaceable></optional> ) ; <optional>...</optional> };
</programlisting>

      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title><command>masters</command> Statement Definition and
          Usage</title>
        <para><command>masters</command>
	  lists allow for a common set of masters to be easily used by
          multiple stub and slave zones.
        </para>
      </sect2>

      <sect2>
        <title><command>options</command> Statement Grammar</title>

        <para>
          This is the grammar of the <command>options</command>
          statement in the <filename>named.conf</filename> file:
        </para>

<programlisting>options {
    <optional> version <replaceable>version_string</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> hostname <replaceable>hostname_string</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> server-id <replaceable>server_id_string</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> directory <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> key-directory <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> named-xfer <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> tkey-domain <replaceable>domainname</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> tkey-dhkey <replaceable>key_name</replaceable> <replaceable>key_tag</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> cache-file <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> dump-file <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> memstatistics-file <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> pid-file <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> statistics-file <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> zone-statistics <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> auth-nxdomain <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> deallocate-on-exit <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> dialup <replaceable>dialup_option</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> fake-iquery <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> fetch-glue <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> flush-zones-on-shutdown <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> has-old-clients <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> host-statistics <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> host-statistics-max <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> minimal-responses <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> multiple-cnames <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> notify <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> | <replaceable>explicit</replaceable> | <replaceable>master-only</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> recursion <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> rfc2308-type1 <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> use-id-pool <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> maintain-ixfr-base <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> dnssec-enable <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> dnssec-validation <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> dnssec-lookaside <replaceable>domain</replaceable> trust-anchor <replaceable>domain</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> dnssec-must-be-secure <replaceable>domain yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> dnssec-accept-expired <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> forward ( <replaceable>only</replaceable> | <replaceable>first</replaceable> ); </optional>
    <optional> forwarders { <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> dual-stack-servers <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> {
        ( <replaceable>domain_name</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> |
          <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ) ; 
        ... }; </optional>
    <optional> check-names ( <replaceable>master</replaceable> | <replaceable>slave</replaceable> | <replaceable>response</replaceable> )
        ( <replaceable>warn</replaceable> | <replaceable>fail</replaceable> | <replaceable>ignore</replaceable> ); </optional>
    <optional> check-mx ( <replaceable>warn</replaceable> | <replaceable>fail</replaceable> | <replaceable>ignore</replaceable> ); </optional>
    <optional> check-wildcard <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> check-integrity <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> check-mx-cname ( <replaceable>warn</replaceable> | <replaceable>fail</replaceable> | <replaceable>ignore</replaceable> ); </optional>
    <optional> check-srv-cname ( <replaceable>warn</replaceable> | <replaceable>fail</replaceable> | <replaceable>ignore</replaceable> ); </optional>
    <optional> check-sibling <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> allow-notify { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> allow-query { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> allow-query-cache { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> allow-transfer { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> allow-recursion { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> allow-update { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> allow-update-forwarding { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> update-check-ksk <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> allow-v6-synthesis { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> blackhole { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> avoid-v4-udp-ports { <replaceable>port_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> avoid-v6-udp-ports { <replaceable>port_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> listen-on <optional> port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> </optional> { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> listen-on-v6 <optional> port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> </optional> { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> query-source ( ( <replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> )
        <optional> port ( <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional> |
	<optional> address ( <replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional>
	<optional> port ( <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional> ) ; </optional>
    <optional> query-source-v6 ( ( <replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> )
	<optional> port ( <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional> | 
	<optional> address ( <replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional> 
	<optional> port ( <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional> ) ; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-time-in <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-time-out <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-idle-in <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-idle-out <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> tcp-clients <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> recursive-clients <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> serial-query-rate <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> serial-queries <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> tcp-listen-queue <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> transfer-format <replaceable>( one-answer | many-answers )</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> transfers-in  <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> transfers-out <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> transfers-per-ns <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> alt-transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> alt-transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> use-alt-transfer-source <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> notify-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> notify-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> also-notify { <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> max-ixfr-log-size <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> max-journal-size <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> coresize <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> datasize <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> files <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> stacksize <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> cleaning-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> heartbeat-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> interface-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> statistics-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> topology { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }</optional>;
    <optional> sortlist { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }</optional>;
    <optional> rrset-order { <replaceable>order_spec</replaceable> ; <optional> <replaceable>order_spec</replaceable> ; ... </optional> </optional> };
    <optional> lame-ttl <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> max-ncache-ttl <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> max-cache-ttl <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> sig-validity-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> min-roots <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> use-ixfr <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> provide-ixfr <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> request-ixfr <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> treat-cr-as-space <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> min-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> min-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> additional-from-auth <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> additional-from-cache <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> random-device <replaceable>path_name</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-cache-size <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> match-mapped-addresses <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> preferred-glue ( <replaceable>A</replaceable> | <replaceable>AAAA</replaceable> | <replaceable>NONE</replaceable> ); </optional>
    <optional> edns-udp-size <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> max-udp-size <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> root-delegation-only <optional> exclude { <replaceable>namelist</replaceable> } </optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> querylog <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> disable-algorithms <replaceable>domain</replaceable> { <replaceable>algorithm</replaceable>; <optional> <replaceable>algorithm</replaceable>; </optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> acache-enable <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> acache-cleaning-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> max-acache-size <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> clients-per-query <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-clients-per-query <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> masterfile-format (<constant>text</constant>|<constant>raw</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> empty-server <replaceable>name</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> empty-contact <replaceable>name</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> empty-zones-enable <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> disable-empty-zone <replaceable>zone_name</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> zero-no-soa-ttl <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> zero-no-soa-ttl-cache <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
};
</programlisting>

      </sect2>

      <sect2 id="options">
        <title><command>options</command> Statement Definition and
          Usage</title>

        <para>
          The <command>options</command> statement sets up global
          options
          to be used by <acronym>BIND</acronym>. This statement
          may appear only
          once in a configuration file. If there is no <command>options</command>
          statement, an options block with each option set to its default will
          be used.
        </para>

        <variablelist>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>directory</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                The working directory of the server.
                Any non-absolute pathnames in the configuration file will be
                taken
                as relative to this directory. The default location for most
                server
                output files (e.g. <filename>named.run</filename>)
                is this directory.
                If a directory is not specified, the working directory
                defaults to `<filename>.</filename>', the directory from
                which the server
                was started. The directory specified should be an absolute
                path.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>key-directory</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                When performing dynamic update of secure zones, the
                directory where the public and private key files should be
                found,
                if different than the current working directory.  The
                directory specified
                must be an absolute path.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>named-xfer</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                <emphasis>This option is obsolete.</emphasis>
                It was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 to
                specify the pathname to the <command>named-xfer</command> program.
                In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, no separate <command>named-xfer</command> program is
                needed; its functionality is built into the name server.
              </para>

            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>tkey-domain</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                The domain appended to the names of all
                shared keys generated with
                <command>TKEY</command>. When a client
                requests a <command>TKEY</command> exchange, it
                may or may not specify
                the desired name for the key. If present, the name of the
                shared
                key will be "<varname>client specified part</varname>" +
                "<varname>tkey-domain</varname>".
                Otherwise, the name of the shared key will be "<varname>random hex
digits</varname>" + "<varname>tkey-domain</varname>". In most cases,
                the <command>domainname</command> should be the
                server's domain
                name.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>tkey-dhkey</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                The Diffie-Hellman key used by the server
                to generate shared keys with clients using the Diffie-Hellman
                mode
                of <command>TKEY</command>. The server must be
                able to load the
                public and private keys from files in the working directory.
                In
                most cases, the keyname should be the server's host name.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>cache-file</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
		This is for testing only.  Do not use.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>dump-file</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                The pathname of the file the server dumps
                the database to when instructed to do so with
                <command>rndc dumpdb</command>.
                If not specified, the default is <filename>named_dump.db</filename>.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>memstatistics-file</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                The pathname of the file the server writes memory
                usage statistics to on exit. If not specified,
                the default is
                <filename>named.memstats</filename>.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>pid-file</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                The pathname of the file the server writes its process ID
                in. If not specified, the default is <filename>/var/run/named.pid</filename>.
                The pid-file is used by programs that want to send signals to
                the running
                name server. Specifying <command>pid-file none</command> disables the
                use of a PID file &mdash; no file will be written and any
                existing one will be removed.  Note that <command>none</command>
                is a keyword, not a file name, and therefore is not enclosed
                in
                double quotes.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>statistics-file</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                The pathname of the file the server appends statistics
                to when instructed to do so using <command>rndc stats</command>.
                If not specified, the default is <filename>named.stats</filename> in the
                server's current directory.  The format of the file is
                described
                in <xref linkend="statsfile"/>.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>port</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                The UDP/TCP port number the server uses for
                receiving and sending DNS protocol traffic.
                The default is 53.  This option is mainly intended for server
                testing;
                a server using a port other than 53 will not be able to
                communicate with
                the global DNS.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>random-device</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                The source of entropy to be used by the server.  Entropy is
                primarily needed
                for DNSSEC operations, such as TKEY transactions and dynamic
                update of signed
                zones.  This options specifies the device (or file) from which
                to read
                entropy.  If this is a file, operations requiring entropy will
                fail when the
                file has been exhausted.  If not specified, the default value
                is
                <filename>/dev/random</filename>
                (or equivalent) when present, and none otherwise.  The
                <command>random-device</command> option takes
                effect during
                the initial configuration load at server startup time and
                is ignored on subsequent reloads.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>preferred-glue</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                If specified, the listed type (A or AAAA) will be emitted
                before other glue
                in the additional section of a query response.
                The default is not to prefer any type (NONE).
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>root-delegation-only</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                Turn on enforcement of delegation-only in TLDs (top level domains) and root zones
                with an optional
                exclude list.
              </para>
              <para>
                Note some TLDs are not delegation only (e.g. "DE", "LV", "US"
                and "MUSEUM").
              </para>

<programlisting>
options {
	root-delegation-only exclude { "de"; "lv"; "us"; "museum"; };
};
</programlisting>

            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>disable-algorithms</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                Disable the specified DNSSEC algorithms at and below the
                specified name.
                Multiple <command>disable-algorithms</command>
                statements are allowed.
                Only the most specific will be applied.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>dnssec-lookaside</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                When set, <command>dnssec-lookaside</command>
                provides the
                validator with an alternate method to validate DNSKEY records
                at the
                top of a zone.  When a DNSKEY is at or below a domain
                specified by the
                deepest <command>dnssec-lookaside</command>, and
                the normal dnssec validation
                has left the key untrusted, the trust-anchor will be append to
                the key
                name and a DLV record will be looked up to see if it can
                validate the
                key.  If the DLV record validates a DNSKEY (similarly to the
                way a DS
                record does) the DNSKEY RRset is deemed to be trusted.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

          <varlistentry>
            <term><command>dnssec-must-be-secure</command></term>
            <listitem>
              <para>
                Specify hierarchies which must be or may not be secure (signed and
                validated).
                If <userinput>yes</userinput>, then named will only accept
                answers if they
                are secure.
                If <userinput>no</userinput>, then normal dnssec validation
                applies
                allowing for insecure answers to be accepted.
                The specified domain must be under a <command>trusted-key</command> or
                <command>dnssec-lookaside</command> must be
                active.
              </para>
            </listitem>
          </varlistentry>

        </variablelist>

        <sect3 id="boolean_options">
          <title>Boolean Options</title>

          <variablelist>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>auth-nxdomain</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  If <userinput>yes</userinput>, then the <command>AA</command> bit
                  is always set on NXDOMAIN responses, even if the server is
                  not actually
                  authoritative. The default is <userinput>no</userinput>;
                  this is
                  a change from <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8. If you
                  are using very old DNS software, you
                  may need to set it to <userinput>yes</userinput>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>deallocate-on-exit</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  This option was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym>
                  8 to enable checking
                  for memory leaks on exit. <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 ignores the option and always performs
                  the checks.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>dialup</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  If <userinput>yes</userinput>, then the
                  server treats all zones as if they are doing zone transfers
                  across
                  a dial-on-demand dialup link, which can be brought up by
                  traffic
                  originating from this server. This has different effects
                  according
                  to zone type and concentrates the zone maintenance so that
                  it all
                  happens in a short interval, once every <command>heartbeat-interval</command> and
                  hopefully during the one call. It also suppresses some of
                  the normal
                  zone maintenance traffic. The default is <userinput>no</userinput>.
                </para>
                <para>
                  The <command>dialup</command> option
                  may also be specified in the <command>view</command> and
                  <command>zone</command> statements,
                  in which case it overrides the global <command>dialup</command>
                  option.
                </para>
                <para>
                  If the zone is a master zone, then the server will send out a
                  NOTIFY
                  request to all the slaves (default). This should trigger the
                  zone serial
                  number check in the slave (providing it supports NOTIFY)
                  allowing the slave
                  to verify the zone while the connection is active.
                  The set of servers to which NOTIFY is sent can be controlled
                  by
                  <command>notify</command> and <command>also-notify</command>.
                </para>
                <para>
                  If the
                  zone is a slave or stub zone, then the server will suppress
                  the regular
                  "zone up to date" (refresh) queries and only perform them
                  when the
                  <command>heartbeat-interval</command> expires in
                  addition to sending
                  NOTIFY requests.
                </para>
                <para>
                  Finer control can be achieved by using
                  <userinput>notify</userinput> which only sends NOTIFY
                  messages,
                  <userinput>notify-passive</userinput> which sends NOTIFY
                  messages and
                  suppresses the normal refresh queries, <userinput>refresh</userinput>
                  which suppresses normal refresh processing and sends refresh
                  queries
                  when the <command>heartbeat-interval</command>
                  expires, and
                  <userinput>passive</userinput> which just disables normal
                  refresh
                  processing.
                </para>

                <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
                  <tgroup cols="4" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="4Level-table">
                    <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.150in"/>
                    <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="1.150in"/>
                    <colspec colname="3" colnum="3" colsep="0" colwidth="1.150in"/>
                    <colspec colname="4" colnum="4" colsep="0" colwidth="1.150in"/>
                    <tbody>
                      <row rowsep="0">
                        <entry colname="1">
                          <para>
                            dialup mode
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="2">
                          <para>
                            normal refresh
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="3">
                          <para>
                            heart-beat refresh
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="4">
                          <para>
                            heart-beat notify
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                      </row>
                      <row rowsep="0">
                        <entry colname="1">
                          <para><command>no</command> (default)</para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="2">
                          <para>
                            yes
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="3">
                          <para>
                            no
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="4">
                          <para>
                            no
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                      </row>
                      <row rowsep="0">
                        <entry colname="1">
                          <para><command>yes</command></para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="2">
                          <para>
                            no
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="3">
                          <para>
                            yes
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="4">
                          <para>
                            yes
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                      </row>
                      <row rowsep="0">
                        <entry colname="1">
                          <para><command>notify</command></para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="2">
                          <para>
                            yes
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="3">
                          <para>
                            no
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="4">
                          <para>
                            yes
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                      </row>
                      <row rowsep="0">
                        <entry colname="1">
                          <para><command>refresh</command></para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="2">
                          <para>
                            no
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="3">
                          <para>
                            yes
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="4">
                          <para>
                            no
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                      </row>
                      <row rowsep="0">
                        <entry colname="1">
                          <para><command>passive</command></para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="2">
                          <para>
                            no
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="3">
                          <para>
                            no
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="4">
                          <para>
                            no
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                      </row>
                      <row rowsep="0">
                        <entry colname="1">
                          <para><command>notify-passive</command></para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="2">
                          <para>
                            no
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="3">
                          <para>
                            no
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                        <entry colname="4">
                          <para>
                            yes
                          </para>
                        </entry>
                      </row>
                    </tbody>
                  </tgroup>
                </informaltable>

                <para>
                  Note that normal NOTIFY processing is not affected by
                  <command>dialup</command>.
                </para>

              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>fake-iquery</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8, this option
                  enabled simulating the obsolete DNS query type
                  IQUERY. <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 never does
                  IQUERY simulation.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>fetch-glue</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  This option is obsolete.
                  In BIND 8, <userinput>fetch-glue yes</userinput>
                  caused the server to attempt to fetch glue resource records
                  it
                  didn't have when constructing the additional
                  data section of a response.  This is now considered a bad
                  idea
                  and BIND 9 never does it.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>flush-zones-on-shutdown</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  When the nameserver exits due receiving SIGTERM,
                  flush or do not flush any pending zone writes.  The default
                  is
                  <command>flush-zones-on-shutdown</command> <userinput>no</userinput>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>has-old-clients</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  This option was incorrectly implemented
                  in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8, and is ignored by <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.
                  To achieve the intended effect
                  of
                  <command>has-old-clients</command> <userinput>yes</userinput>, specify
                  the two separate options <command>auth-nxdomain</command> <userinput>yes</userinput>
                  and <command>rfc2308-type1</command> <userinput>no</userinput> instead.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>host-statistics</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  In BIND 8, this enables keeping of
                  statistics for every host that the name server interacts
                  with.
                  Not implemented in BIND 9.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>maintain-ixfr-base</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  <emphasis>This option is obsolete</emphasis>.
                  It was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 to
                  determine whether a transaction log was
                  kept for Incremental Zone Transfer. <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 maintains a transaction
                  log whenever possible.  If you need to disable outgoing
                  incremental zone
                  transfers, use <command>provide-ixfr</command> <userinput>no</userinput>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>minimal-responses</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  If <userinput>yes</userinput>, then when generating
                  responses the server will only add records to the authority
                  and additional data sections when they are required (e.g.
                  delegations, negative responses).  This may improve the
		  performance of the server.
                  The default is <userinput>no</userinput>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>multiple-cnames</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  This option was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 to allow
                  a domain name to have multiple CNAME records in violation of
                  the DNS standards.  <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.2 onwards
                  always strictly enforces the CNAME rules both in master
		  files and dynamic updates.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>notify</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  If <userinput>yes</userinput> (the default),
                  DNS NOTIFY messages are sent when a zone the server is
                  authoritative for
                  changes, see <xref linkend="notify"/>.  The messages are
                  sent to the
                  servers listed in the zone's NS records (except the master
                  server identified
                  in the SOA MNAME field), and to any servers listed in the
                  <command>also-notify</command> option.
                </para>
                <para>
                  If <userinput>master-only</userinput>, notifies are only
                  sent
                  for master zones.
                  If <userinput>explicit</userinput>, notifies are sent only
                  to
                  servers explicitly listed using <command>also-notify</command>.
                  If <userinput>no</userinput>, no notifies are sent.
                </para>
                <para>
                  The <command>notify</command> option may also be
                  specified in the <command>zone</command>
                  statement,
                  in which case it overrides the <command>options notify</command> statement.
                  It would only be necessary to turn off this option if it
                  caused slaves
                  to crash.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>recursion</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  If <userinput>yes</userinput>, and a
                  DNS query requests recursion, then the server will attempt
                  to do
                  all the work required to answer the query. If recursion is
                  off
                  and the server does not already know the answer, it will
                  return a
                  referral response. The default is
                  <userinput>yes</userinput>.
                  Note that setting <command>recursion no</command> does not prevent
                  clients from getting data from the server's cache; it only
                  prevents new data from being cached as an effect of client
                  queries.
                  Caching may still occur as an effect the server's internal
                  operation, such as NOTIFY address lookups.
                  See also <command>fetch-glue</command> above.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>rfc2308-type1</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Setting this to <userinput>yes</userinput> will
                  cause the server to send NS records along with the SOA
                  record for negative
                  answers. The default is <userinput>no</userinput>.
                </para>
                <note>
                  <simpara>
                    Not yet implemented in <acronym>BIND</acronym>
                    9.
                  </simpara>
                </note>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>use-id-pool</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  <emphasis>This option is obsolete</emphasis>.
                  <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 always allocates query
                  IDs from a pool.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>zone-statistics</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  If <userinput>yes</userinput>, the server will collect
                  statistical data on all zones (unless specifically turned
                  off
                  on a per-zone basis by specifying <command>zone-statistics no</command>
                  in the <command>zone</command> statement).
                  These statistics may be accessed
                  using <command>rndc stats</command>, which will
                  dump them to the file listed
                  in the <command>statistics-file</command>.  See
                  also <xref linkend="statsfile"/>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>use-ixfr</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  <emphasis>This option is obsolete</emphasis>.
                  If you need to disable IXFR to a particular server or
                  servers see
                  the information on the <command>provide-ixfr</command> option
                  in <xref linkend="server_statement_definition_and_usage"/>.
                  See also
                  <xref linkend="incremental_zone_transfers"/>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>provide-ixfr</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  See the description of
                  <command>provide-ixfr</command> in
                  <xref linkend="server_statement_definition_and_usage"/>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>request-ixfr</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  See the description of
                  <command>request-ixfr</command> in
                  <xref linkend="server_statement_definition_and_usage"/>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>treat-cr-as-space</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  This option was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym>
                  8 to make
                  the server treat carriage return ("<command>\r</command>") characters the same way
                  as a space or tab character,
                  to facilitate loading of zone files on a UNIX system that
                  were generated
                  on an NT or DOS machine. In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, both UNIX "<command>\n</command>"
                  and NT/DOS "<command>\r\n</command>" newlines
                  are always accepted,
                  and the option is ignored.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>additional-from-auth</command></term>
              <term><command>additional-from-cache</command></term>
              <listitem>

                <para>
                  These options control the behavior of an authoritative
                  server when
                  answering queries which have additional data, or when
                  following CNAME
                  and DNAME chains.
                </para>

                <para>
                  When both of these options are set to <userinput>yes</userinput>
                  (the default) and a
                  query is being answered from authoritative data (a zone
                  configured into the server), the additional data section of
                  the
                  reply will be filled in using data from other authoritative
                  zones
                  and from the cache.  In some situations this is undesirable,
                  such
                  as when there is concern over the correctness of the cache,
                  or
                  in servers where slave zones may be added and modified by
                  untrusted third parties.  Also, avoiding
                  the search for this additional data will speed up server
                  operations
                  at the possible expense of additional queries to resolve
                  what would
                  otherwise be provided in the additional section.
                </para>

                <para>
                  For example, if a query asks for an MX record for host <literal>foo.example.com</literal>,
                  and the record found is "<literal>MX 10 mail.example.net</literal>", normally the address
                  records (A and AAAA) for <literal>mail.example.net</literal> will be provided as well,
                  if known, even though they are not in the example.com zone.
                  Setting these options to <command>no</command>
                  disables this behavior and makes
                  the server only search for additional data in the zone it
                  answers from.
                </para>

                <para>
                  These options are intended for use in authoritative-only
                  servers, or in authoritative-only views.  Attempts to set
                  them to <command>no</command> without also
                  specifying
                  <command>recursion no</command> will cause the
                  server to
                  ignore the options and log a warning message.
                </para>

                <para>
                  Specifying <command>additional-from-cache no</command> actually
                  disables the use of the cache not only for additional data
                  lookups
                  but also when looking up the answer.  This is usually the
                  desired
                  behavior in an authoritative-only server where the
                  correctness of
                  the cached data is an issue.
                </para>

                <para>
                  When a name server is non-recursively queried for a name
                  that is not
                  below the apex of any served zone, it normally answers with
                  an
                  "upwards referral" to the root servers or the servers of
                  some other
                  known parent of the query name.  Since the data in an
                  upwards referral
                  comes from the cache, the server will not be able to provide
                  upwards
                  referrals when <command>additional-from-cache no</command>
                  has been specified.  Instead, it will respond to such
                  queries
                  with REFUSED.  This should not cause any problems since
                  upwards referrals are not required for the resolution
                  process.
                </para>

              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>match-mapped-addresses</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  If <userinput>yes</userinput>, then an
                  IPv4-mapped IPv6 address will match any address match
                  list entries that match the corresponding IPv4 address.
                  Enabling this option is sometimes useful on IPv6-enabled
                  Linux
                  systems, to work around a kernel quirk that causes IPv4
                  TCP connections such as zone transfers to be accepted
                  on an IPv6 socket using mapped addresses, causing
                  address match lists designed for IPv4 to fail to match.
                  The use of this option for any other purpose is discouraged.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>ixfr-from-differences</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  When <userinput>yes</userinput> and the server loads a new version of a master
                  zone from its zone file or receives a new version of a slave
                  file by a non-incremental zone transfer, it will compare
                  the new version to the previous one and calculate a set
                  of differences.  The differences are then logged in the
                  zone's journal file such that the changes can be transmitted
                  to downstream slaves as an incremental zone transfer.
                </para>
                <para>
                  By allowing incremental zone transfers to be used for
                  non-dynamic zones, this option saves bandwidth at the
                  expense of increased CPU and memory consumption at the
                  master.
                  In particular, if the new version of a zone is completely
                  different from the previous one, the set of differences
                  will be of a size comparable to the combined size of the
                  old and new zone version, and the server will need to
                  temporarily allocate memory to hold this complete
                  difference set.
                </para>
                <para><command>ixfr-from-differences</command>
		  also accepts <command>master</command> and
                  <command>slave</command> at the view and options
                  levels which causes
                  <command>ixfr-from-differences</command> to apply to
                  all <command>master</command> or
                  <command>slave</command> zones respectively.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>multi-master</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  This should be set when you have multiple masters for a zone
                  and the
                  addresses refer to different machines.  If <userinput>yes</userinput>, named will
                  not log
                  when the serial number on the master is less than what named
                  currently
                  has.  The default is <userinput>no</userinput>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>dnssec-enable</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Enable DNSSEC support in named.  Unless set to <userinput>yes</userinput>,
                  named behaves as if it does not support DNSSEC.
                  The default is <userinput>yes</userinput>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>dnssec-validation</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Enable DNSSEC validation in named.
		  Note <command>dnssec-enable</command> also needs to be
		  set to <userinput>yes</userinput> to be effective.
                  The default is <userinput>no</userinput>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>dnssec-accept-expired</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
		  Accept expired signatures when verifying DNSSEC signatures.
                  The default is <userinput>no</userinput>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>querylog</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Specify whether query logging should be started when named
                  starts.
                  If <command>querylog</command> is not specified,
                  then the query logging
                  is determined by the presence of the logging category <command>queries</command>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>check-names</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  This option is used to restrict the character set and syntax
                  of
                  certain domain names in master files and/or DNS responses
                  received
                  from the network.  The default varies according to usage
                  area.  For
                  <command>master</command> zones the default is <command>fail</command>.
                  For <command>slave</command> zones the default
                  is <command>warn</command>.
                  For answers received from the network (<command>response</command>)
                  the default is <command>ignore</command>.
                </para>
                <para>
                  The rules for legal hostnames and mail domains are derived
                  from RFC 952 and RFC 821 as modified by RFC 1123.
                </para>
                <para><command>check-names</command>
		  applies to the owner names of A, AAA and MX records.
		  It also applies to the domain names in the RDATA of NS, SOA
		  and MX records.
		  It also applies to the RDATA of PTR records where the owner
		  name indicated that it is a reverse lookup of a hostname
		  (the owner name ends in IN-ADDR.ARPA, IP6.ARPA or IP6.INT).
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>check-mx</command></term>
	      <listitem>
		<para>
		  Check whether the MX record appears to refer to a IP address.
		  The default is to <command>warn</command>.  Other possible
		  values are <command>fail</command> and
		  <command>ignore</command>.
		</para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>check-wildcard</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  This option is used to check for non-terminal wildcards.
                  The use of non-terminal wildcards is almost always as a
                  result of a failure
                  to understand the wildcard matching algorithm (RFC 1034).
                  This option
                  affects master zones.  The default (<command>yes</command>) is to check
                  for non-terminal wildcards and issue a warning.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>check-integrity</command></term>
	      <listitem>
		<para>
		  Perform post load zone integrity checks on master
		  zones.  This checks that MX and SRV records refer
		  to address (A or AAAA) records and that glue
		  address records exist for delegated zones.  For
		  MX and SRV records only in-zone hostnames are
		  checked (for out-of-zone hostnames use named-checkzone).
		  For NS records only names below top of zone are
		  checked (for out-of-zone names and glue consistancy
		  checks use named-checkzone).  The default is
		  <command>yes</command>.
		</para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>check-mx-cname</command></term>
	      <listitem>
		<para>
		  If <command>check-integrity</command> is set then
		  fail, warn or ignore MX records that refer
		  to CNAMES.  The default is to <command>warn</command>.
		</para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>check-srv-cname</command></term>
	      <listitem>
		<para>
		  If <command>check-integrity</command> is set then
		  fail, warn or ignore SRV records that refer
		  to CNAMES.  The default is to <command>warn</command>.
		</para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>check-sibling</command></term>
	      <listitem>
		<para>
		  When performing integrity checks, also check that
		  sibling glue exists.  The default is <command>yes</command>.
		</para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>zero-no-soa-ttl</command></term>
	      <listitem>
	        <para>
		  When returning authoritative negative responses to
		  SOA queries set the TTL of the SOA recored returned in
		  the authority section to zero.
		  The default is <command>yes</command>.
	        </para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>zero-no-soa-ttl-cache</command></term>
	      <listitem>
	        <para>
		  When caching a negative response to a SOA query
		  set the TTL to zero.
		  The default is <command>no</command>.
	        </para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>update-check-ksk</command></term>
	      <listitem>
	        <para>
		  When regenerating the RRSIGs following a UPDATE
		  request to a secure zone, check the KSK flag on
		  the DNSKEY RR to determine if this key should be
		  used to generate the RRSIG.  This flag is ignored
		  if there are not DNSKEY RRs both with and without
		  a KSK.
		  The default is <command>yes</command>.
		</para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

          </variablelist>

        </sect3>

        <sect3>
          <title>Forwarding</title>
          <para>
            The forwarding facility can be used to create a large site-wide
            cache on a few servers, reducing traffic over links to external
            name servers. It can also be used to allow queries by servers that
            do not have direct access to the Internet, but wish to look up
            exterior
            names anyway. Forwarding occurs only on those queries for which
            the server is not authoritative and does not have the answer in
            its cache.
          </para>

          <variablelist>
            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>forward</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  This option is only meaningful if the
                  forwarders list is not empty. A value of <varname>first</varname>,
                  the default, causes the server to query the forwarders
                  first &mdash; and
                  if that doesn't answer the question, the server will then
                  look for
                  the answer itself. If <varname>only</varname> is
                  specified, the
                  server will only query the forwarders.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>forwarders</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Specifies the IP addresses to be used
                  for forwarding. The default is the empty list (no
                  forwarding).
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

          </variablelist>

          <para>
            Forwarding can also be configured on a per-domain basis, allowing
            for the global forwarding options to be overridden in a variety
            of ways. You can set particular domains to use different
            forwarders,
            or have a different <command>forward only/first</command> behavior,
            or not forward at all, see <xref linkend="zone_statement_grammar"/>.
          </para>
        </sect3>

        <sect3>
          <title>Dual-stack Servers</title>
          <para>
            Dual-stack servers are used as servers of last resort to work
            around
            problems in reachability due the lack of support for either IPv4
            or IPv6
            on the host machine.
          </para>

          <variablelist>
            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>dual-stack-servers</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Specifies host names or addresses of machines with access to
                  both IPv4 and IPv6 transports. If a hostname is used, the
                  server must be able
                  to resolve the name using only the transport it has.  If the
                  machine is dual
                  stacked, then the <command>dual-stack-servers</command> have no effect unless
                  access to a transport has been disabled on the command line
                  (e.g. <command>named -4</command>).
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>
          </variablelist>
        </sect3>

        <sect3 id="access_control">
          <title>Access Control</title>

          <para>
            Access to the server can be restricted based on the IP address
            of the requesting system. See <xref linkend="address_match_lists"/> for
            details on how to specify IP address lists.
          </para>

          <variablelist>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>allow-notify</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Specifies which hosts are allowed to
                  notify this server, a slave, of zone changes in addition
                  to the zone masters.
                  <command>allow-notify</command> may also be
                  specified in the
                  <command>zone</command> statement, in which case
                  it overrides the
                  <command>options allow-notify</command>
                  statement.  It is only meaningful
                  for a slave zone.  If not specified, the default is to
                  process notify messages
                  only from a zone's master.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>allow-query</command></term>
	      <listitem>
		<para>
		  Specifies which hosts are allowed to ask ordinary
		  DNS questions. <command>allow-query</command> may
		  also be specified in the <command>zone</command>
		  statement, in which case it overrides the
		  <command>options allow-query</command> statement.
		  If not specified, the default is to allow queries
		  from all hosts.
		</para>
		<note>
		  <para>
		    <command>allow-query-cache</command> is now
		    used to specify access to the cache.
		  </para>
		</note>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>allow-query-cache</command></term>
	      <listitem>
		<para>
		  Specifies which hosts are allowed to get answers
		  from the cache. The default is the builtin acls
		  <command>localnets</command> and
		  <command>localhost</command>.
		</para>
		<para>
		  The way to set query access to the cache is now
		  via <command>allow-query-cache</command>.
		  This differs from earlier versions which used
		  <command>allow-query</command>.
		</para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>allow-recursion</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
		  Specifies which hosts are allowed to make recursive
		  queries through this server. If not specified,
		  the default is to allow recursive queries from
		  the builtin acls <command>localnets</command> and
		  <command>localhost</command>.
		  Note that disallowing recursive queries for a
		  host does not prevent the host from retrieving
		  data that is already in the server's cache.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>allow-update</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Specifies which hosts are allowed to
                  submit Dynamic DNS updates for master zones. The default is
                  to deny
                  updates from all hosts.  Note that allowing updates based
                  on the requestor's IP address is insecure; see
                  <xref linkend="dynamic_update_security"/> for details.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>allow-update-forwarding</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Specifies which hosts are allowed to
                  submit Dynamic DNS updates to slave zones to be forwarded to
                  the
                  master.  The default is <userinput>{ none; }</userinput>,
                  which
                  means that no update forwarding will be performed.  To
                  enable
                  update forwarding, specify
                  <userinput>allow-update-forwarding { any; };</userinput>.
                  Specifying values other than <userinput>{ none; }</userinput> or
                  <userinput>{ any; }</userinput> is usually
                  counterproductive, since
                  the responsibility for update access control should rest
                  with the
                  master server, not the slaves.
                </para>
                <para>
                  Note that enabling the update forwarding feature on a slave
                  server
                  may expose master servers relying on insecure IP address
                  based
                  access control to attacks; see <xref linkend="dynamic_update_security"/>
                  for more details.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>allow-v6-synthesis</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  This option was introduced for the smooth transition from
                  AAAA
                  to A6 and from "nibble labels" to binary labels.
                  However, since both A6 and binary labels were then
                  deprecated,
                  this option was also deprecated.
                  It is now ignored with some warning messages.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>allow-transfer</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Specifies which hosts are allowed to
                  receive zone transfers from the server. <command>allow-transfer</command> may
                  also be specified in the <command>zone</command>
                  statement, in which
                  case it overrides the <command>options allow-transfer</command> statement.
                  If not specified, the default is to allow transfers to all
                  hosts.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>blackhole</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Specifies a list of addresses that the
                  server will not accept queries from or use to resolve a
                  query. Queries
                  from these addresses will not be responded to. The default
                  is <userinput>none</userinput>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

          </variablelist>

        </sect3>

        <sect3>
          <title>Interfaces</title>
          <para>
            The interfaces and ports that the server will answer queries
            from may be specified using the <command>listen-on</command> option. <command>listen-on</command> takes
            an optional port, and an <varname>address_match_list</varname>.
            The server will listen on all interfaces allowed by the address
            match list. If a port is not specified, port 53 will be used.
          </para>
          <para>
            Multiple <command>listen-on</command> statements are
            allowed.
            For example,
          </para>

<programlisting>listen-on { 5.6.7.8; };
listen-on port 1234 { !1.2.3.4; 1.2/16; };
</programlisting>

          <para>
            will enable the name server on port 53 for the IP address
            5.6.7.8, and on port 1234 of an address on the machine in net
            1.2 that is not 1.2.3.4.
          </para>

          <para>
            If no <command>listen-on</command> is specified, the
            server will listen on port 53 on all interfaces.
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>listen-on-v6</command> option is used to
            specify the interfaces and the ports on which the server will
            listen
            for incoming queries sent using IPv6.
          </para>

          <para>
            When <programlisting>{ any; }</programlisting> is
            specified
            as the <varname>address_match_list</varname> for the
            <command>listen-on-v6</command> option,
            the server does not bind a separate socket to each IPv6 interface
            address as it does for IPv4 if the operating system has enough API
            support for IPv6 (specifically if it conforms to RFC 3493 and RFC
            3542).
            Instead, it listens on the IPv6 wildcard address.
            If the system only has incomplete API support for IPv6, however,
            the behavior is the same as that for IPv4.
          </para>

          <para>
            A list of particular IPv6 addresses can also be specified, in
            which case
            the server listens on a separate socket for each specified
            address,
            regardless of whether the desired API is supported by the system.
          </para>

          <para>
            Multiple <command>listen-on-v6</command> options can
            be used.
            For example,
          </para>

<programlisting>listen-on-v6 { any; };
listen-on-v6 port 1234 { !2001:db8::/32; any; };
</programlisting>

          <para>
            will enable the name server on port 53 for any IPv6 addresses
            (with a single wildcard socket),
            and on port 1234 of IPv6 addresses that is not in the prefix
            2001:db8::/32 (with separate sockets for each matched address.)
          </para>

          <para>
            To make the server not listen on any IPv6 address, use
          </para>

<programlisting>listen-on-v6 { none; };
</programlisting>

          <para>
            If no <command>listen-on-v6</command> option is
            specified,
            the server will not listen on any IPv6 address.
          </para>
        </sect3>

        <sect3>
          <title>Query Address</title>
          <para>
            If the server doesn't know the answer to a question, it will
            query other name servers. <command>query-source</command> specifies
            the address and port used for such queries. For queries sent over
            IPv6, there is a separate <command>query-source-v6</command> option.
            If <command>address</command> is <command>*</command> (asterisk) or is omitted,
            a wildcard IP address (<command>INADDR_ANY</command>)
            will be used.
            If <command>port</command> is <command>*</command> or is omitted,
            a random unprivileged port will be used. The <command>avoid-v4-udp-ports</command>
            and <command>avoid-v6-udp-ports</command> options can be used
            to prevent named
            from selecting certain ports. The defaults are:
          </para>

<programlisting>query-source address * port *;
query-source-v6 address * port *;
</programlisting>

          <note>
            <para>
              The address specified in the <command>query-source</command> option
              is used for both UDP and TCP queries, but the port applies only
              to
              UDP queries.  TCP queries always use a random
              unprivileged port.
            </para>
          </note>
	  <note>
	    <para>
	      Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the source
	      address for TCP sockets.
	    </para>
	  </note>
          <note>
            <para>
              See also <command>transfer-source</command> and
              <command>notify-source</command>.
            </para>
          </note>
        </sect3>

        <sect3 id="zone_transfers">
          <title>Zone Transfers</title>
          <para>
            <acronym>BIND</acronym> has mechanisms in place to
            facilitate zone transfers
            and set limits on the amount of load that transfers place on the
            system. The following options apply to zone transfers.
          </para>

          <variablelist>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>also-notify</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Defines a global list of IP addresses of name servers
                  that are also sent NOTIFY messages whenever a fresh copy of
                  the
                  zone is loaded, in addition to the servers listed in the
                  zone's NS records.
                  This helps to ensure that copies of the zones will
                  quickly converge on stealth servers. If an <command>also-notify</command> list
                  is given in a <command>zone</command> statement,
                  it will override
                  the <command>options also-notify</command>
                  statement. When a <command>zone notify</command>
                  statement
                  is set to <command>no</command>, the IP
                  addresses in the global <command>also-notify</command> list will
                  not be sent NOTIFY messages for that zone. The default is
                  the empty
                  list (no global notification list).
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>max-transfer-time-in</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Inbound zone transfers running longer than
                  this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 120
                  minutes
                  (2 hours).  The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>max-transfer-idle-in</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Inbound zone transfers making no progress
                  in this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 60
                  minutes
                  (1 hour).  The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>max-transfer-time-out</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Outbound zone transfers running longer than
                  this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 120
                  minutes
                  (2 hours).  The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>max-transfer-idle-out</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Outbound zone transfers making no progress
                  in this many minutes will be terminated.  The default is 60
                  minutes (1
                  hour).  The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>serial-query-rate</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Slave servers will periodically query master servers
                  to find out if zone serial numbers have changed. Each such
                  query uses
                  a minute amount of the slave server's network bandwidth.  To
                  limit the
                  amount of bandwidth used, BIND 9 limits the rate at which
                  queries are
                  sent.  The value of the <command>serial-query-rate</command> option,
                  an integer, is the maximum number of queries sent per
                  second.
                  The default is 20.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>serial-queries</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  In BIND 8, the <command>serial-queries</command>
                  option
                  set the maximum number of concurrent serial number queries
                  allowed to be outstanding at any given time.
                  BIND 9 does not limit the number of outstanding
                  serial queries and ignores the <command>serial-queries</command> option.
                  Instead, it limits the rate at which the queries are sent
                  as defined using the <command>serial-query-rate</command> option.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>transfer-format</command></term>
              <listitem>

                <para>
                  Zone transfers can be sent using two different formats,
                  <command>one-answer</command> and
		  <command>many-answers</command>.
                  The <command>transfer-format</command> option is used
                  on the master server to determine which format it sends.
                  <command>one-answer</command> uses one DNS message per
                  resource record transferred.
                  <command>many-answers</command> packs as many resource
		  records as possible into a message.
		  <command>many-answers</command> is more efficient, but is
		  only supported by relatively new slave servers,
                  such as <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, <acronym>BIND</acronym>
		  8.x and <acronym>BIND</acronym> 4.9.5 onwards.
	          The <command>many-answers</command> format is also supported by
		  recent Microsoft Windows nameservers.
		  The default is <command>many-answers</command>.
		  <command>transfer-format</command> may be overridden on a
		  per-server basis by using the <command>server</command>
		  statement.
                </para>

              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>transfers-in</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
                  that can be running concurrently. The default value is <literal>10</literal>.
                  Increasing <command>transfers-in</command> may
                  speed up the convergence
                  of slave zones, but it also may increase the load on the
                  local system.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>transfers-out</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The maximum number of outbound zone transfers
                  that can be running concurrently. Zone transfer requests in
                  excess
                  of the limit will be refused. The default value is <literal>10</literal>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>transfers-per-ns</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
                  that can be concurrently transferring from a given remote
                  name server.
                  The default value is <literal>2</literal>.
                  Increasing <command>transfers-per-ns</command>
                  may
                  speed up the convergence of slave zones, but it also may
                  increase
                  the load on the remote name server. <command>transfers-per-ns</command> may
                  be overridden on a per-server basis by using the <command>transfers</command> phrase
                  of the <command>server</command> statement.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>transfer-source</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para><command>transfer-source</command>
		  determines which local address will be bound to IPv4
                  TCP connections used to fetch zones transferred
                  inbound by the server.  It also determines the
                  source IPv4 address, and optionally the UDP port,
                  used for the refresh queries and forwarded dynamic
                  updates.  If not set, it defaults to a system
                  controlled value which will usually be the address
                  of the interface "closest to" the remote end. This
                  address must appear in the remote end's
                  <command>allow-transfer</command> option for the
                  zone being transferred, if one is specified. This
                  statement sets the
                  <command>transfer-source</command> for all zones,
                  but can be overridden on a per-view or per-zone
                  basis by including a
                  <command>transfer-source</command> statement within
                  the <command>view</command> or
                  <command>zone</command> block in the configuration
                  file.
                </para>
	        <note>
	          <para>
	            Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the
		    source address for TCP sockets.
	          </para>
                </note>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>transfer-source-v6</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The same as <command>transfer-source</command>,
                  except zone transfers are performed using IPv6.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>alt-transfer-source</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
                  <command>transfer-source</command> fails and
                  <command>use-alt-transfer-source</command> is
                  set.
                </para>
		<note>
		  If you do not wish the alternate transfer source
		  to be used, you should set
		  <command>use-alt-transfer-source</command>
		  appropriately and you should not depend upon
		  getting a answer back to the first refresh
		  query.
		</note>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>alt-transfer-source-v6</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
                  <command>transfer-source-v6</command> fails and
                  <command>use-alt-transfer-source</command> is
                  set.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>use-alt-transfer-source</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Use the alternate transfer sources or not.  If views are
                  specified this defaults to <command>no</command>
                  otherwise it defaults to
                  <command>yes</command> (for BIND 8
                  compatibility).
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>notify-source</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para><command>notify-source</command>
		  determines which local source address, and
                  optionally UDP port, will be used to send NOTIFY
                  messages.  This address must appear in the slave
                  server's <command>masters</command> zone clause or
                  in an <command>allow-notify</command> clause.  This
                  statement sets the <command>notify-source</command>
                  for all zones, but can be overridden on a per-zone or
                  per-view basis by including a
                  <command>notify-source</command> statement within
                  the <command>zone</command> or
                  <command>view</command> block in the configuration
                  file.
                </para>
	        <note>
	          <para>
	            Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the
		    source address for TCP sockets.
	          </para>
                </note>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>notify-source-v6</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Like <command>notify-source</command>,
                  but applies to notify messages sent to IPv6 addresses.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

          </variablelist>

        </sect3>

        <sect3>
          <title>Bad UDP Port Lists</title>
          <para><command>avoid-v4-udp-ports</command>
	    and <command>avoid-v6-udp-ports</command> specify a list
            of IPv4 and IPv6 UDP ports that will not be used as system
            assigned source ports for UDP sockets.  These lists
            prevent named from choosing as its random source port a
            port that is blocked by your firewall.  If a query went
            out with such a source port, the answer would not get by
            the firewall and the name server would have to query
            again.
          </para>
        </sect3>

        <sect3>
          <title>Operating System Resource Limits</title>

          <para>
            The server's usage of many system resources can be limited.
            Scaled values are allowed when specifying resource limits.  For
            example, <command>1G</command> can be used instead of
            <command>1073741824</command> to specify a limit of
            one
            gigabyte. <command>unlimited</command> requests
            unlimited use, or the
            maximum available amount. <command>default</command>
            uses the limit
            that was in force when the server was started. See the description
            of <command>size_spec</command> in <xref linkend="configuration_file_elements"/>.
          </para>

          <para>
            The following options set operating system resource limits for
            the name server process.  Some operating systems don't support
            some or
            any of the limits. On such systems, a warning will be issued if
            the
            unsupported limit is used.
          </para>

          <variablelist>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>coresize</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The maximum size of a core dump. The default
                  is <literal>default</literal>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>datasize</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The maximum amount of data memory the server
                  may use. The default is <literal>default</literal>.
                  This is a hard limit on server memory usage.
                  If the server attempts to allocate memory in excess of this
                  limit, the allocation will fail, which may in turn leave
                  the server unable to perform DNS service.  Therefore,
                  this option is rarely useful as a way of limiting the
                  amount of memory used by the server, but it can be used
                  to raise an operating system data size limit that is
                  too small by default.  If you wish to limit the amount
                  of memory used by the server, use the
                  <command>max-cache-size</command> and
                  <command>recursive-clients</command>
                  options instead.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>files</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The maximum number of files the server
                  may have open concurrently. The default is <literal>unlimited</literal>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>stacksize</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The maximum amount of stack memory the server
                  may use. The default is <literal>default</literal>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

          </variablelist>

        </sect3>

        <sect3>
          <title>Server  Resource Limits</title>

          <para>
            The following options set limits on the server's
            resource consumption that are enforced internally by the
            server rather than the operating system.
          </para>

          <variablelist>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>max-ixfr-log-size</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  This option is obsolete; it is accepted
                  and ignored for BIND 8 compatibility.  The option
                  <command>max-journal-size</command> performs a
                  similar function in BIND 9.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>max-journal-size</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Sets a maximum size for each journal file
                  (see <xref linkend="journal"/>).  When the journal file
                  approaches
                  the specified size, some of the oldest transactions in the
                  journal
                  will be automatically removed.  The default is
                  <literal>unlimited</literal>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>host-statistics-max</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  In BIND 8, specifies the maximum number of host statistics
                  entries to be kept.
                  Not implemented in BIND 9.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>recursive-clients</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The maximum number of simultaneous recursive lookups
                  the server will perform on behalf of clients.  The default
                  is
                  <literal>1000</literal>.  Because each recursing
                  client uses a fair
                  bit of memory, on the order of 20 kilobytes, the value of
                  the
                  <command>recursive-clients</command> option may
                  have to be decreased
                  on hosts with limited memory.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>tcp-clients</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The maximum number of simultaneous client TCP
                  connections that the server will accept.
                  The default is <literal>100</literal>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>max-cache-size</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The maximum amount of memory to use for the
                  server's cache, in bytes.  When the amount of data in the
                  cache
                  reaches this limit, the server will cause records to expire
                  prematurely so that the limit is not exceeded.  In a server
                  with
                  multiple views, the limit applies separately to the cache of
                  each
                  view.  The default is <literal>unlimited</literal>, meaning that
                  records are purged from the cache only when their TTLs
                  expire.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>tcp-listen-queue</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The listen queue depth.  The default and minimum is 3.
                  If the kernel supports the accept filter "dataready" this
                  also controls how
                  many TCP connections that will be queued in kernel space
                  waiting for
                  some data before being passed to accept.  Values less than 3
                  will be
                  silently raised.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

          </variablelist>

        </sect3>

        <sect3>
          <title>Periodic Task Intervals</title>

          <variablelist>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>cleaning-interval</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The server will remove expired resource records
                  from the cache every <command>cleaning-interval</command> minutes.
                  The default is 60 minutes.  The maximum value is 28 days
                  (40320 minutes).
                  If set to 0, no periodic cleaning will occur.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>heartbeat-interval</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The server will perform zone maintenance tasks
                  for all zones marked as <command>dialup</command> whenever this
                  interval expires. The default is 60 minutes. Reasonable
                  values are up
                  to 1 day (1440 minutes).  The maximum value is 28 days
                  (40320 minutes).
                  If set to 0, no zone maintenance for these zones will occur.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>interface-interval</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The server will scan the network interface list
                  every <command>interface-interval</command>
                  minutes. The default
                  is 60 minutes. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                  If set to 0, interface scanning will only occur when
                  the configuration file is  loaded. After the scan, the
                  server will
                  begin listening for queries on any newly discovered
                  interfaces (provided they are allowed by the
                  <command>listen-on</command> configuration), and
                  will
                  stop listening on interfaces that have gone away.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>statistics-interval</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Name server statistics will be logged
                  every <command>statistics-interval</command>
                  minutes. The default is
                  60. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                  If set to 0, no statistics will be logged.
                  </para><note>
                  <simpara>
                    Not yet implemented in
                    <acronym>BIND</acronym>9.
                  </simpara>
                </note>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

          </variablelist>

        </sect3>

        <sect3 id="topology">
          <title>Topology</title>

          <para>
            All other things being equal, when the server chooses a name
            server
            to query from a list of name servers, it prefers the one that is
            topologically closest to itself. The <command>topology</command> statement
            takes an <command>address_match_list</command> and
            interprets it
            in a special way. Each top-level list element is assigned a
            distance.
            Non-negated elements get a distance based on their position in the
            list, where the closer the match is to the start of the list, the
            shorter the distance is between it and the server. A negated match
            will be assigned the maximum distance from the server. If there
            is no match, the address will get a distance which is further than
            any non-negated list element, and closer than any negated element.
            For example,
          </para>

<programlisting>topology {
    10/8;
    !1.2.3/24;
    { 1.2/16; 3/8; };
};</programlisting>

          <para>
            will prefer servers on network 10 the most, followed by hosts
            on network 1.2.0.0 (netmask 255.255.0.0) and network 3, with the
            exception of hosts on network 1.2.3 (netmask 255.255.255.0), which
            is preferred least of all.
          </para>
          <para>
            The default topology is
          </para>

<programlisting>    topology { localhost; localnets; };
</programlisting>

          <note>
            <simpara>
              The <command>topology</command> option
              is not implemented in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.
            </simpara>
          </note>
        </sect3>

        <sect3 id="the_sortlist_statement">

          <title>The <command>sortlist</command> Statement</title>

          <para>
            The response to a DNS query may consist of multiple resource
            records (RRs) forming a resource records set (RRset).
            The name server will normally return the
            RRs within the RRset in an indeterminate order
            (but see the <command>rrset-order</command>
            statement in <xref linkend="rrset_ordering"/>).
            The client resolver code should rearrange the RRs as appropriate,
            that is, using any addresses on the local net in preference to
            other addresses.
            However, not all resolvers can do this or are correctly
            configured.
            When a client is using a local server, the sorting can be performed
            in the server, based on the client's address. This only requires
            configuring the name servers, not all the clients.
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>sortlist</command> statement (see below)
            takes
            an <command>address_match_list</command> and
            interprets it even
            more specifically than the <command>topology</command>
            statement
            does (<xref linkend="topology"/>).
            Each top level statement in the <command>sortlist</command> must
            itself be an explicit <command>address_match_list</command> with
            one or two elements. The first element (which may be an IP
            address,
            an IP prefix, an ACL name or a nested <command>address_match_list</command>)
            of each top level list is checked against the source address of
            the query until a match is found.
          </para>
          <para>
            Once the source address of the query has been matched, if
            the top level statement contains only one element, the actual
            primitive
            element that matched the source address is used to select the
            address
            in the response to move to the beginning of the response. If the
            statement is a list of two elements, then the second element is
            treated the same as the <command>address_match_list</command> in
            a <command>topology</command> statement. Each top
            level element
            is assigned a distance and the address in the response with the
            minimum
            distance is moved to the beginning of the response.
          </para>
          <para>
            In the following example, any queries received from any of
            the addresses of the host itself will get responses preferring
            addresses
            on any of the locally connected networks. Next most preferred are
            addresses
            on the 192.168.1/24 network, and after that either the
            192.168.2/24
            or
            192.168.3/24 network with no preference shown between these two
            networks. Queries received from a host on the 192.168.1/24 network
            will prefer other addresses on that network to the 192.168.2/24
            and
            192.168.3/24 networks. Queries received from a host on the
            192.168.4/24
            or the 192.168.5/24 network will only prefer other addresses on
            their directly connected networks.
          </para>

<programlisting>sortlist {
    { localhost;                                   // IF   the local host
        { localnets;                               // THEN first fit on the
            192.168.1/24;                          //   following nets
            { 192.168.2/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
    { 192.168.1/24;                                // IF   on class C 192.168.1
        { 192.168.1/24;                            // THEN use .1, or .2 or .3
            { 192.168.2/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
    { 192.168.2/24;                                // IF   on class C 192.168.2
        { 192.168.2/24;                            // THEN use .2, or .1 or .3
            { 192.168.1/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
    { 192.168.3/24;                                // IF   on class C 192.168.3
        { 192.168.3/24;                            // THEN use .3, or .1 or .2
            { 192.168.1/24; 192.168.2/24; }; }; };
    { { 192.168.4/24; 192.168.5/24; };             // if .4 or .5, prefer that net
    };
};</programlisting>

          <para>
            The following example will give reasonable behavior for the
            local host and hosts on directly connected networks. It is similar
            to the behavior of the address sort in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 4.9.x. Responses sent
            to queries from the local host will favor any of the directly
            connected
            networks. Responses sent to queries from any other hosts on a
            directly
            connected network will prefer addresses on that same network.
            Responses
            to other queries will not be sorted.
          </para>

<programlisting>sortlist {
           { localhost; localnets; };
           { localnets; };
};
</programlisting>

        </sect3>
        <sect3 id="rrset_ordering">
          <title id="rrset_ordering_title">RRset Ordering</title>
          <para>
            When multiple records are returned in an answer it may be
            useful to configure the order of the records placed into the
            response.
            The <command>rrset-order</command> statement permits
            configuration
            of the ordering of the records in a multiple record response.
            See also the <command>sortlist</command> statement,
            <xref linkend="the_sortlist_statement"/>.
          </para>

          <para>
            An <command>order_spec</command> is defined as
            follows:
          </para>
          <para>
	    <optional>class <replaceable>class_name</replaceable></optional>
            <optional>type <replaceable>type_name</replaceable></optional>
            <optional>name <replaceable>"domain_name"</replaceable></optional>
	    order <replaceable>ordering</replaceable>
	  </para>
          <para>
            If no class is specified, the default is <command>ANY</command>.
            If no type is specified, the default is <command>ANY</command>.
            If no name is specified, the default is "<command>*</command>" (asterisk).
          </para>
          <para>
            The legal values for <command>ordering</command> are:
          </para>
          <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="4Level-table">
              <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="0.750in"/>
              <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="3.750in"/>
              <tbody>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>fixed</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Records are returned in the order they
                      are defined in the zone file.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>random</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Records are returned in some random order.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>cyclic</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Records are returned in a round-robin
                      order.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
              </tbody>
            </tgroup>
          </informaltable>
          <para>
            For example:
          </para>

<programlisting>rrset-order {
   class IN type A name "host.example.com" order random;
   order cyclic;
};
</programlisting>

          <para>
            will cause any responses for type A records in class IN that
            have "<literal>host.example.com</literal>" as a
            suffix, to always be returned
            in random order. All other records are returned in cyclic order.
          </para>
          <para>
            If multiple <command>rrset-order</command> statements
            appear,
            they are not combined &mdash; the last one applies.
          </para>

          <note>
            <simpara>
              The <command>rrset-order</command> statement
              is not yet fully implemented in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.
              BIND 9 currently does not fully support "fixed" ordering.
            </simpara>
          </note>
        </sect3>

        <sect3 id="tuning">
          <title>Tuning</title>

          <variablelist>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>lame-ttl</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Sets the number of seconds to cache a
                  lame server indication. 0 disables caching. (This is
                  <emphasis role="bold">NOT</emphasis> recommended.)
                  The default is <literal>600</literal> (10 minutes) and the
                  maximum value is
                  <literal>1800</literal> (30 minutes).
                </para>

              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>max-ncache-ttl</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  To reduce network traffic and increase performance,
                  the server stores negative answers. <command>max-ncache-ttl</command> is
                  used to set a maximum retention time for these answers in
                  the server
                  in seconds. The default
                  <command>max-ncache-ttl</command> is <literal>10800</literal> seconds (3 hours).
                  <command>max-ncache-ttl</command> cannot exceed
                  7 days and will
                  be silently truncated to 7 days if set to a greater value.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>max-cache-ttl</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
		  Sets the maximum time for which the server will
                  cache ordinary (positive) answers. The default is
                  one week (7 days).
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>min-roots</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The minimum number of root servers that
                  is required for a request for the root servers to be
                  accepted. The default
                  is <userinput>2</userinput>.
                </para>
                <note>
                  <simpara>
                    Not implemented in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.
                  </simpara>
                </note>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>sig-validity-interval</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  Specifies the number of days into the
                  future when DNSSEC signatures automatically generated as a
                  result
                  of dynamic updates (<xref linkend="dynamic_update"/>)
                  will expire. The default is <literal>30</literal> days.
                  The maximum value is 10 years (3660 days). The signature
                  inception time is unconditionally set to one hour before the
                  current time
                  to allow for a limited amount of clock skew.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>min-refresh-time</command></term>
              <term><command>max-refresh-time</command></term>
              <term><command>min-retry-time</command></term>
              <term><command>max-retry-time</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  These options control the server's behavior on refreshing a
                  zone
                  (querying for SOA changes) or retrying failed transfers.
                  Usually the SOA values for the zone are used, but these
                  values
                  are set by the master, giving slave server administrators
                  little
                  control over their contents.
                </para>
                <para>
                  These options allow the administrator to set a minimum and
                  maximum
                  refresh and retry time either per-zone, per-view, or
                  globally.
                  These options are valid for slave and stub zones,
                  and clamp the SOA refresh and retry times to the specified
                  values.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>edns-udp-size</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
		  Sets the advertised EDNS UDP buffer size in bytes.  Valid
                  values are 512 to 4096 (values outside this range
                  will be silently adjusted).  The default value is
                  4096.  The usual reason for setting edns-udp-size to
                  a non-default value it to get UDP answers to pass
                  through broken firewalls that block fragmented
                  packets and/or block UDP packets that are greater
                  than 512 bytes.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>max-udp-size</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
		  Sets the maximum EDNS UDP message size named will
		  send in bytes.  Valid values are 512 to 4096 (values outside
		  this range will be silently adjusted).  The default
		  value is 4096.  The usual reason for setting
		  max-udp-size to a non-default value is to get UDP
		  answers to pass through broken firewalls that
		  block fragmented packets and/or block UDP packets
		  that are greater than 512 bytes.
		</para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>masterfile-format</command></term>
	      <listitem>
	        <para>Specifies
		  the file format of zone files (see
	          <xref linkend="zonefile_format"/>).
	          The default value is <constant>text</constant>, which is the
		  standard textual representation.  Files in other formats
		  than <constant>text</constant> are typically expected
		  to be generated by the <command>named-compilezone</command> tool.
		  Note that when a zone file in a different format than
		  <constant>text</constant> is loaded, <command>named</command>
	          may omit some of the checks which would be performed for a
		  file in the <constant>text</constant> format.  In particular,
		  <command>check-names</command> checks do not apply
		  for the <constant>raw</constant> format.  This means
		  a zone file in the <constant>raw</constant> format
		  must be generated with the same check level as that
		  specified in the <command>named</command> configuration
		  file.  This statement sets the
		  <command>masterfile-format</command> for all zones,
		  but can be overridden on a per-zone or per-view basis
		  by including a <command>masterfile-format</command>
		  statement within the <command>zone</command> or
		  <command>view</command> block in the configuration
		  file.
	        </para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>

	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>clients-per-query</command></term>
	      <term><command>max-clients-per-query</command></term>
              <listitem>
		<para>These set the
		  initial value (minimum) and maximum number of recursive
		  simultanious clients for any given query
		  (&lt;qname,qtype,qclass&gt;) that the server will accept
		  before dropping additional clients.  named will attempt to
		  self tune this value and changes will be logged.  The
		  default values are 10 and 100.
		</para>
		<para>
	          This value should reflect how many queries come in for
		  a given name in the time it takes to resolve that name.
		  If the number of queries exceed this value, named will
		  assume that it is dealing with a non-responsive zone
		  and will drop additional queries.  If it gets a response
		  after dropping queries, it will raise the estimate.  The
		  estimate will then be lowered in 20 minutes if it has
		  remained unchanged.
		</para>
		<para>
		  If <command>clients-per-query</command> is set to zero,
		  then there is no limit on the number of clients per query
		  and no queries will be dropped.
		</para>
		<para>
		  If <command>max-clients-per-query</command> is set to zero,
		  then there is no upper bound other than imposed by
		  <command>recursive-clients</command>.
		</para>
              </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>
	  </variablelist>

        </sect3>

        <sect3 id="builtin">
          <title>Built-in server information zones</title>

          <para>
            The server provides some helpful diagnostic information
            through a number of built-in zones under the
            pseudo-top-level-domain <literal>bind</literal> in the
            <command>CHAOS</command> class.  These zones are part
            of a
            built-in view (see <xref linkend="view_statement_grammar"/>) of
            class
            <command>CHAOS</command> which is separate from the
            default view of
            class <command>IN</command>; therefore, any global
            server options
            such as <command>allow-query</command> do not apply
            the these zones.
            If you feel the need to disable these zones, use the options
            below, or hide the built-in <command>CHAOS</command>
            view by
            defining an explicit view of class <command>CHAOS</command>
            that matches all clients.
          </para>

          <variablelist>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>version</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The version the server should report
                  via a query of the name <literal>version.bind</literal>
                  with type <command>TXT</command>, class <command>CHAOS</command>.
                  The default is the real version number of this server.
                  Specifying <command>version none</command>
                  disables processing of the queries.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>hostname</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The hostname the server should report via a query of
                  the name <filename>hostname.bind</filename>
                  with type <command>TXT</command>, class <command>CHAOS</command>.
                  This defaults to the hostname of the machine hosting the
                  name server as
                  found by the gethostname() function.  The primary purpose of such queries
                  is to
                  identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually
                  answering your queries.  Specifying <command>hostname none;</command>
                  disables processing of the queries.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>server-id</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The ID of the server should report via a query of
                  the name <filename>ID.SERVER</filename>
                  with type <command>TXT</command>, class <command>CHAOS</command>.
                  The primary purpose of such queries is to
                  identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually
                  answering your queries.  Specifying <command>server-id none;</command>
                  disables processing of the queries.
                  Specifying <command>server-id hostname;</command> will cause named to
                  use the hostname as found by the gethostname() function.
                  The default <command>server-id</command> is <command>none</command>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

          </variablelist>

        </sect3>

        <sect3 id="empty">
          <title>Built-in Empty Zones</title>
	  <para>
	    Named has some built-in empty zones (SOA and NS records only).
	    These are for zones that should normally be answered locally
	    and which queries should not be sent to the Internet's root
	    servers.  The offical servers which cover these namespaces
	    return NXDOMAIN responses to these queries.  In particular,
	    these cover the reverse namespace for addresses from RFC 1918 and
	    RFC 3330.  They also include the reverse namespace for IPv6 local
	    address (locally assigned), IPv6 link local addresses, the IPv6
	    loopback address and the IPv6 unknown addresss.
	  </para>
	  <para>
	    Named will attempt to determine if a built in zone already exists
	    or is active (covered by a forward-only forwarding declaration)
	    and will not not create a empty zone in that case.
	  </para>
	  <para>
	    The current list of empty zones is:
	    <itemizedlist>
	      <listitem>10.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>127.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>254.169.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>16.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>17.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>18.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>19.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>20.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>21.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>22.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>23.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>24.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>25.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>26.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>27.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>28.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>29.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>30.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>31.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>168.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>2.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.IP6.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>1.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.IP6.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>D.F.IP6.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>8.E.F.IP6.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>9.E.F.IP6.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>A.E.F.IP6.ARPA</listitem>
	      <listitem>B.E.F.IP6.ARPA</listitem>
	    </itemizedlist>
	  </para>
	  <para>
	    Empty zones are settable at the view level and only apply to
	    views of class IN.  Disabled empty zones are only inherited
	    from options if there are no disabled empty zones specified
	    at the view level.  To override the options list of disabled
	    zones, you can disable the root zone at the view level, for example:
<programlisting>
	    disable-empty-zone ".";
</programlisting>
	  </para>
	  <para>
	    If you are using the address ranges covered here, you should
	    already have reverse zones covering the addresses you use.
	    In practice this appears to not be the case with many queries
	    being made to the infrustructure servers for names in these
	    spaces.  So many in fact that sacrificial servers were needed
	    to be deployed to channel the query load away from the
	    infrustructure servers.
	  </para>
	  <note>
	    The real parent servers for these zones should disable all
	    empty zone under the parent zone they serve.  For the real
	    root servers, this is all built in empty zones.  This will
	    enable them to return referrals to deeper in the tree.
	  </note>
          <variablelist>
	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>empty-server</command></term>
	      <listitem>
	        <para>
		  Specify what server name will appear in the returned
		  SOA record for empty zones.  If none is specified, then
		  the zone's name will be used.
	        </para>
	       </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>
	      
	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>empty-contact</command></term>
	      <listitem>
	        <para>
		  Specify what contact name will appear in the returned
		  SOA record for empty zones.  If none is specified, then
		  "." will be used.
	        </para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>
  
	    <varlistentry>
	      <term><command>empty-zones-enable</command></term>
	      <listitem>
	        <para>
		  Enable or disable all empty zones.  By default they
		  are enabled.
	        </para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>
  
	    <varlistentry>
	    <term><command>disable-empty-zone</command></term>
	      <listitem>
	        <para>
		  Disable individual empty zones.  By default none are
		  disabled.  This option can be specified multiple times.
	        </para>
	      </listitem>
	    </varlistentry>
          </variablelist>
        </sect3>
  
        <sect3 id="statsfile">
          <title>The Statistics File</title>

          <para>
            The statistics file generated by <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9
            is similar, but not identical, to that
            generated by <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8.
          </para>
          <para>
            The statistics dump begins with a line, like:
	  </para>
          <para>
	    <command>+++ Statistics Dump +++ (973798949)</command>
	  </para>
	  <para>
	    The number in parentheses is a standard
            Unix-style timestamp, measured as seconds since January 1, 1970.
            Following
            that line are a series of lines containing a counter type, the
            value of the
            counter, optionally a zone name, and optionally a view name.
            The lines without view and zone listed are global statistics for
            the entire server.
            Lines with a zone and view name for the given view and zone (the
            view name is
            omitted for the default view).
	  </para>
	  <para>
	    The statistics dump ends with the line where the
            number is identical to the number in the beginning line; for example:
          </para>
          <para>
	    <command>--- Statistics Dump --- (973798949)</command>
          </para>
          <para>
            The following statistics counters are maintained:
          </para>
          <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="4Level-table">
              <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.150in"/>
              <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="3.350in"/>
              <tbody>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>success</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      The number of
                      successful queries made to the server or zone.  A
                      successful query
                      is defined as query which returns a NOERROR response
                      with at least
                      one answer RR.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>referral</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      The number of queries which resulted
                      in referral responses.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>nxrrset</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      The number of queries which resulted in
                      NOERROR responses with no data.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>nxdomain</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      The number
                      of queries which resulted in NXDOMAIN responses.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>failure</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      The number of queries which resulted in a
                      failure response other than those above.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>recursion</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      The number of queries which caused the server
                      to perform recursion in order to find the final answer.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
              </tbody>
            </tgroup>
          </informaltable>

          <para>
            Each query received by the server will cause exactly one of
            <command>success</command>,
            <command>referral</command>,
            <command>nxrrset</command>,
            <command>nxdomain</command>, or
            <command>failure</command>
            to be incremented, and may additionally cause the
            <command>recursion</command> counter to be
            incremented.
          </para>

        </sect3>

        <sect3 id="acache">
          <title>Additional Section Caching</title>

          <para>
            The additional section cache, also called <command>acache</command>,
            is an internal cache to improve the response performance of BIND 9.
            When additional section caching is enabled, BIND 9 will
            cache an internal short-cut to the additional section content for
            each answer RR.
            Note that <command>acache</command> is an internal caching
            mechanism of BIND 9, and is not related to the DNS caching
            server function.
          </para>

          <para>
            Additional section caching does not change the
            response content (except the RRsets ordering of the additional
            section, see below), but can improve the response performance
            significantly.
            It is particularly effective when BIND 9 acts as an authoritative
            server for a zone that has many delegations with many glue RRs.
          </para>

          <para>
            In order to obtain the maximum performance improvement
            from additional section caching, setting
            <command>additional-from-cache</command>
            to <command>no</command> is recommended, since the current
            implementation of <command>acache</command>
            does not short-cut of additional section information from the
            DNS cache data.
          </para>

          <para>
            One obvious disadvantage of <command>acache</command> is
            that it requires much more
            memory for the internal cached data.
            Thus, if the response performance does not matter and memory
            consumption is much more critical, the
            <command>acache</command> mechanism can be
            disabled by setting <command>acache-enable</command> to
            <command>no</command>.
            It is also possible to specify the upper limit of memory
            consumption
            for acache by using <command>max-acache-size</command>.
          </para>

          <para>
            Additional section caching also has a minor effect on the
            RRset ordering in the additional section.
            Without <command>acache</command>,
            <command>cyclic</command> order is effective for the additional
            section as well as the answer and authority sections.
            However, additional section caching fixes the ordering when it
            first caches an RRset for the additional section, and the same
            ordering will be kept in succeeding responses, regardless of the
            setting of <command>rrset-order</command>.
            The effect of this should be minor, however, since an
            RRset in the additional section
            typically only contains a small number of RRs (and in many cases
            it only contains a single RR), in which case the
            ordering does not matter much.
          </para>

          <para>
            The following is a summary of options related to
            <command>acache</command>.
          </para>

          <variablelist>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>acache-enable</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  If <command>yes</command>, additional section caching is
		  enabled.  The default value is <command>no</command>.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>acache-cleaning-interval</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The server will remove stale cache entries, based on an LRU
                  based
                  algorithm, every <command>acache-cleaning-interval</command> minutes.
                  The default is 60 minutes.
                  If set to 0, no periodic cleaning will occur.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

            <varlistentry>
              <term><command>max-acache-size</command></term>
              <listitem>
                <para>
                  The maximum amount of memory in bytes to use for the server's acache.
                  When the amount of data in the acache reaches this limit,
                  the server
                  will clean more aggressively so that the limit is not
                  exceeded.
                  In a server with multiple views, the limit applies
                  separately to the
                  acache of each view.
                  The default is <literal>unlimited</literal>,
                  meaning that
                  entries are purged from the acache only at the
                  periodic cleaning time.
                </para>
              </listitem>
            </varlistentry>

          </variablelist>

        </sect3>

      </sect2>

      <sect2 id="server_statement_grammar">
        <title><command>server</command> Statement Grammar</title>

<programlisting>server <replaceable>ip_addr[/prefixlen]</replaceable> {
    <optional> bogus <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> provide-ixfr <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> request-ixfr <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> edns <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> edns-udp-size <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-udp-size <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> transfers <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> transfer-format <replaceable>( one-answer | many-answers )</replaceable> ; ]</optional>
    <optional> keys <replaceable>{ string ; <optional> string ; <optional>...</optional></optional> }</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> notify-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> notify-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> query-source <optional> address ( <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional> <optional> port ( <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional>; </optional>
    <optional> query-source-v6 <optional> address ( <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional> <optional> port ( <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional>; </optional>
};
</programlisting>

        </sect2>

        <sect2 id="server_statement_definition_and_usage">
          <title><command>server</command> Statement Definition and
            Usage</title>

          <para>
            The <command>server</command> statement defines
            characteristics
            to be associated with a remote name server.  If a prefix length is
            specified, then a range of servers is covered.  Only the most
            specific
            server clause applies regardless of the order in
            <filename>named.conf</filename>.
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>server</command> statement can occur at
            the top level of the
            configuration file or inside a <command>view</command>
            statement.
            If a <command>view</command> statement contains
            one or more <command>server</command> statements, only
            those
            apply to the view and any top-level ones are ignored.
            If a view contains no <command>server</command>
            statements,
            any top-level <command>server</command> statements are
            used as
            defaults.
          </para>

          <para>
            If you discover that a remote server is giving out bad data,
            marking it as bogus will prevent further queries to it. The
            default
            value of <command>bogus</command> is <command>no</command>.
          </para>
          <para>
            The <command>provide-ixfr</command> clause determines
            whether
            the local server, acting as master, will respond with an
            incremental
            zone transfer when the given remote server, a slave, requests it.
            If set to <command>yes</command>, incremental transfer
            will be provided
            whenever possible. If set to <command>no</command>,
            all transfers
            to the remote server will be non-incremental. If not set, the
            value
            of the <command>provide-ixfr</command> option in the
            view or
            global options block is used as a default.
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>request-ixfr</command> clause determines
            whether
            the local server, acting as a slave, will request incremental zone
            transfers from the given remote server, a master. If not set, the
            value of the <command>request-ixfr</command> option in
            the view or
            global options block is used as a default.
          </para>

          <para>
            IXFR requests to servers that do not support IXFR will
            automatically
            fall back to AXFR.  Therefore, there is no need to manually list
            which servers support IXFR and which ones do not; the global
            default
            of <command>yes</command> should always work.
            The purpose of the <command>provide-ixfr</command> and
            <command>request-ixfr</command> clauses is
            to make it possible to disable the use of IXFR even when both
            master
            and slave claim to support it, for example if one of the servers
            is buggy and crashes or corrupts data when IXFR is used.
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>edns</command> clause determines whether
            the local server will attempt to use EDNS when communicating
	    with the remote server.  The default is <command>yes</command>.
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>edns-udp-size</command> option sets the EDNS UDP size
	    that is advertised by named when querying the remote server.
	    Valid values are 512 to 4096 bytes (values outside this range will be
	    silently adjusted).  This option is useful when you wish to
	    advertises a different value to this server than the value you
	    advertise globally, for example, when there is a firewall at the
	    remote site that is blocking large replies.
          </para>

          <para>
	    The <command>max-udp-size</command> option sets the
	    maximum EDNS UDP message size named will send.  Valid
	    values are 512 to 4096 bytes (values outside this range will
	    be silently adjusted).  This option is useful when you
	    know that there is a firewall that is blocking large
	    replies from named.
	  </para>

          <para>
            The server supports two zone transfer methods. The first, <command>one-answer</command>,
            uses one DNS message per resource record transferred. <command>many-answers</command> packs
            as many resource records as possible into a message. <command>many-answers</command> is
            more efficient, but is only known to be understood by <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, <acronym>BIND</acronym>
            8.x, and patched versions of <acronym>BIND</acronym>
            4.9.5. You can specify which method
            to use for a server with the <command>transfer-format</command> option.
            If <command>transfer-format</command> is not
            specified, the <command>transfer-format</command>
            specified
            by the <command>options</command> statement will be
            used.
          </para>

          <para><command>transfers</command>
	    is used to limit the number of concurrent inbound zone
            transfers from the specified server. If no
            <command>transfers</command> clause is specified, the
            limit is set according to the
            <command>transfers-per-ns</command> option.
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>keys</command> clause identifies a
            <command>key_id</command> defined by the <command>key</command> statement,
            to be used for transaction security (TSIG, <xref linkend="tsig"/>)
            when talking to the remote server.
            When a request is sent to the remote server, a request signature
            will be generated using the key specified here and appended to the
            message. A request originating from the remote server is not
            required
            to be signed by this key.
          </para>

          <para>
            Although the grammar of the <command>keys</command>
            clause
            allows for multiple keys, only a single key per server is
            currently
            supported.
          </para>

          <para>
            The <command>transfer-source</command> and
            <command>transfer-source-v6</command> clauses specify
            the IPv4 and IPv6 source
            address to be used for zone transfer with the remote server,
            respectively.
            For an IPv4 remote server, only <command>transfer-source</command> can
            be specified.
            Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server, only
            <command>transfer-source-v6</command> can be
            specified.
            For more details, see the description of
            <command>transfer-source</command> and
            <command>transfer-source-v6</command> in
            <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
          </para>

	  <para>
	    The <command>notify-source</command> and
	    <command>notify-source-v6</command> clauses specify the
	    IPv4 and IPv6 source address to be used for notify
	    messages sent to remote servers, respectively.  For an
	    IPv4 remote server, only <command>notify-source</command>
	    can be specified.  Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server,
	    only <command>notify-source-v6</command> can be specified.
	  </para>

	  <para>
	    The <command>query-source</command> and
	    <command>query-source-v6</command> clauses specify the
	    IPv4 and IPv6 source address to be used for queries
	    sent to remote servers, respectively.  For an IPv4
	    remote server, only <command>query-source</command> can
	    be specified.  Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server,
	    only <command>query-source-v6</command> can be specified.
	  </para>

        </sect2>

        <sect2>
          <title><command>trusted-keys</command> Statement Grammar</title>

<programlisting>trusted-keys {
    <replaceable>string</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>string</replaceable> ;
    <optional> <replaceable>string</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; <optional>...</optional></optional>
};
</programlisting>

        </sect2>
	<sect2>
	  <title><command>trusted-keys</command> Statement Definition
	    and Usage</title>
	  <para>
	    The <command>trusted-keys</command> statement defines
	    DNSSEC security roots. DNSSEC is described in <xref
	    linkend="DNSSEC"/>. A security root is defined when the
	    public key for a non-authoritative zone is known, but
	    cannot be securely obtained through DNS, either because
	    it is the DNS root zone or because its parent zone is
	    unsigned.  Once a key has been configured as a trusted
	    key, it is treated as if it had been validated and
	    proven secure. The resolver attempts DNSSEC validation
	    on all DNS data in subdomains of a security root.
	  </para>
	  <para>
	    All keys (and corresponding zones) listed in
	    <command>trusted-keys</command> are deemed to exist regardless
	    of what parent zones say.  Similarly for all keys listed in
	    <command>trusted-keys</command> only those keys are
	    used to validate the DNSKEY RRset.  The parent's DS RRset
	    will not be used.
	  </para>
	  <para>
	    The <command>trusted-keys</command> statement can contain
	    multiple key entries, each consisting of the key's
	    domain name, flags, protocol, algorithm, and the Base-64
	    representation of the key data.
	  </para>
	</sect2>

        <sect2 id="view_statement_grammar">
          <title><command>view</command> Statement Grammar</title>

<programlisting>view <replaceable>view_name</replaceable>
      <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable></optional> {
      match-clients { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> };
      match-destinations { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> };
      match-recursive-only <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ;
      <optional> <replaceable>view_option</replaceable>; ...</optional>
      <optional> <replaceable>zone_statement</replaceable>; ...</optional>
};
</programlisting>

        </sect2>
        <sect2>
          <title><command>view</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>

          <para>
            The <command>view</command> statement is a powerful
            feature
            of <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 that lets a name server
            answer a DNS query differently
            depending on who is asking. It is particularly useful for
            implementing
            split DNS setups without having to run multiple servers.
          </para>

          <para>
            Each <command>view</command> statement defines a view
            of the
            DNS namespace that will be seen by a subset of clients.  A client
            matches
            a view if its source IP address matches the
            <varname>address_match_list</varname> of the view's
            <command>match-clients</command> clause and its
            destination IP address matches
            the <varname>address_match_list</varname> of the
            view's
            <command>match-destinations</command> clause.  If not
            specified, both
            <command>match-clients</command> and <command>match-destinations</command>
            default to matching all addresses.  In addition to checking IP
            addresses
            <command>match-clients</command> and <command>match-destinations</command>
            can also take <command>keys</command> which provide an
            mechanism for the
            client to select the view.  A view can also be specified
            as <command>match-recursive-only</command>, which
            means that only recursive
            requests from matching clients will match that view.
            The order of the <command>view</command> statements is
            significant &mdash;
            a client request will be resolved in the context of the first
            <command>view</command> that it matches.
          </para>

          <para>
            Zones defined within a <command>view</command>
            statement will
            be only be accessible to clients that match the <command>view</command>.
            By defining a zone of the same name in multiple views, different
            zone data can be given to different clients, for example,
            "internal"
            and "external" clients in a split DNS setup.
          </para>

          <para>
            Many of the options given in the <command>options</command> statement
            can also be used within a <command>view</command>
            statement, and then
            apply only when resolving queries with that view.  When no
            view-specific
            value is given, the value in the <command>options</command> statement
            is used as a default.  Also, zone options can have default values
            specified
            in the <command>view</command> statement; these
            view-specific defaults
            take precedence over those in the <command>options</command> statement.
          </para>

          <para>
            Views are class specific.  If no class is given, class IN
            is assumed.  Note that all non-IN views must contain a hint zone,
            since only the IN class has compiled-in default hints.
          </para>

          <para>
            If there are no <command>view</command> statements in
            the config
            file, a default view that matches any client is automatically
            created
            in class IN. Any <command>zone</command> statements
            specified on
            the top level of the configuration file are considered to be part
            of
            this default view, and the <command>options</command>
            statement will
            apply to the default view. If any explicit <command>view</command>
            statements are present, all <command>zone</command>
            statements must
            occur inside <command>view</command> statements.
          </para>

          <para>
            Here is an example of a typical split DNS setup implemented
            using <command>view</command> statements:
          </para>

<programlisting>view "internal" {
      // This should match our internal networks.
      match-clients { 10.0.0.0/8; };

      // Provide recursive service to internal clients only.
      recursion yes;

      // Provide a complete view of the example.com zone
      // including addresses of internal hosts.
      zone "example.com" {
            type master;
            file "example-internal.db";
      };
};

view "external" {
      // Match all clients not matched by the previous view.
      match-clients { any; };

      // Refuse recursive service to external clients.
      recursion no;

      // Provide a restricted view of the example.com zone
      // containing only publicly accessible hosts.
      zone "example.com" {
           type master;
           file "example-external.db";
      };
};
</programlisting>

        </sect2>
        <sect2 id="zone_statement_grammar">
          <title><command>zone</command>
            Statement Grammar</title>

<programlisting>zone <replaceable>zone_name</replaceable> <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable></optional> {
    type master;
    <optional> allow-query { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> allow-transfer { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> allow-update { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> update-policy { <replaceable>update_policy_rule</replaceable> <optional>...</optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> also-notify { <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> check-names (<constant>warn</constant>|<constant>fail</constant>|<constant>ignore</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> check-mx (<constant>warn</constant>|<constant>fail</constant>|<constant>ignore</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> check-wildcard <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> check-integrity <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> dialup <replaceable>dialup_option</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> file <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> masterfile-format (<constant>text</constant>|<constant>raw</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> journal <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> forward (<constant>only</constant>|<constant>first</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> forwarders { <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> ixfr-base <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> ixfr-tmp-file <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> maintain-ixfr-base <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-ixfr-log-size <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-idle-out <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-time-out <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> notify <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> | <replaceable>explicit</replaceable> | <replaceable>master-only</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> pubkey <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> notify-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> notify-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> zone-statistics <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> sig-validity-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> database <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> min-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> min-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> key-directory <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> zero-no-soa-ttl <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
};

zone <replaceable>zone_name</replaceable> <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable></optional> {
    type slave;
    <optional> allow-notify { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> allow-query { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> allow-transfer { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> allow-update-forwarding { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> update-check-ksk <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> also-notify { <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> check-names (<constant>warn</constant>|<constant>fail</constant>|<constant>ignore</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> dialup <replaceable>dialup_option</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> file <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> masterfile-format (<constant>text</constant>|<constant>raw</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> journal <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> forward (<constant>only</constant>|<constant>first</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> forwarders { <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> ixfr-base <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> ixfr-tmp-file <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> maintain-ixfr-base <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> masters <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> { ( <replaceable>masters_list</replaceable> | <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> <optional>key <replaceable>key</replaceable></optional> ) ; <optional>...</optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> max-ixfr-log-size <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-idle-in <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-idle-out <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-time-in <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-time-out <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> notify <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> | <replaceable>explicit</replaceable> | <replaceable>master-only</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> pubkey <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> alt-transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> alt-transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> use-alt-transfer-source <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> notify-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> notify-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> zone-statistics <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> database <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> min-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> min-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> multi-master <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> zero-no-soa-ttl <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
};

zone <replaceable>zone_name</replaceable> <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable></optional> {
    type hint;
    file <replaceable>string</replaceable> ;
    <optional> delegation-only <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> check-names (<constant>warn</constant>|<constant>fail</constant>|<constant>ignore</constant>) ; // Not Implemented. </optional>
};

zone <replaceable>zone_name</replaceable> <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable></optional> {
    type stub;
    <optional> allow-query { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
    <optional> check-names (<constant>warn</constant>|<constant>fail</constant>|<constant>ignore</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> dialup <replaceable>dialup_option</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> delegation-only <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> file <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> masterfile-format (<constant>text</constant>|<constant>raw</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> forward (<constant>only</constant>|<constant>first</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> forwarders { <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> masters <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> { ( <replaceable>masters_list</replaceable> | <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> <optional>key <replaceable>key</replaceable></optional> ) ; <optional>...</optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-idle-in <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-transfer-time-in <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> pubkey <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> alt-transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> alt-transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
    <optional> use-alt-transfer-source <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
    <optional> zone-statistics <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> database <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> min-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> min-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> max-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
    <optional> multi-master <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
};

zone <replaceable>zone_name</replaceable> <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable></optional> {
    type forward;
    <optional> forward (<constant>only</constant>|<constant>first</constant>) ; </optional>
    <optional> forwarders { <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
    <optional> delegation-only <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
};

zone <replaceable>zone_name</replaceable> <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable></optional> {
    type delegation-only;
};

</programlisting>

        </sect2>
        <sect2>
          <title><command>zone</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>
          <sect3>
            <title>Zone Types</title>
            <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
              <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="3Level-table">
                <!--colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.108in"/-->
                <!--colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="4.017in"/-->
		<colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0"/>
                <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="4.017in"/>
                <tbody>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        <varname>master</varname>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        The server has a master copy of the data
                        for the zone and will be able to provide authoritative
                        answers for
                        it.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        <varname>slave</varname>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        A slave zone is a replica of a master
                        zone. The <command>masters</command> list
                        specifies one or more IP addresses
                        of master servers that the slave contacts to update
                        its copy of the zone.
                        Masters list elements can also be names of other
                        masters lists.
                        By default, transfers are made from port 53 on the
                        servers; this can
                        be changed for all servers by specifying a port number
                        before the
                        list of IP addresses, or on a per-server basis after
                        the IP address.
                        Authentication to the master can also be done with
                        per-server TSIG keys.
                        If a file is specified, then the
                        replica will be written to this file whenever the zone
                        is changed,
                        and reloaded from this file on a server restart. Use
                        of a file is
                        recommended, since it often speeds server startup and
                        eliminates
                        a needless waste of bandwidth. Note that for large
                        numbers (in the
                        tens or hundreds of thousands) of zones per server, it
                        is best to
                        use a two-level naming scheme for zone file names. For
                        example,
                        a slave server for the zone <literal>example.com</literal> might place
                        the zone contents into a file called
                        <filename>ex/example.com</filename> where <filename>ex/</filename> is
                        just the first two letters of the zone name. (Most
                        operating systems
                        behave very slowly if you put 100 000 files into
                        a single directory.)
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        <varname>stub</varname>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        A stub zone is similar to a slave zone,
                        except that it replicates only the NS records of a
                        master zone instead
                        of the entire zone. Stub zones are not a standard part
                        of the DNS;
                        they are a feature specific to the <acronym>BIND</acronym> implementation.
                      </para>

                      <para>
                        Stub zones can be used to eliminate the need for glue
                        NS record
                        in a parent zone at the expense of maintaining a stub
                        zone entry and
                        a set of name server addresses in <filename>named.conf</filename>.
                        This usage is not recommended for new configurations,
                        and BIND 9
                        supports it only in a limited way.
                        In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 4/8, zone
                        transfers of a parent zone
                        included the NS records from stub children of that
                        zone. This meant
                        that, in some cases, users could get away with
                        configuring child stubs
                        only in the master server for the parent zone. <acronym>BIND</acronym>
                        9 never mixes together zone data from different zones
                        in this
                        way. Therefore, if a <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 master serving a parent
                        zone has child stub zones configured, all the slave
                        servers for the
                        parent zone also need to have the same child stub
                        zones
                        configured.
                      </para>

                      <para>
                        Stub zones can also be used as a way of forcing the
                        resolution
                        of a given domain to use a particular set of
                        authoritative servers.
                        For example, the caching name servers on a private
                        network using
                        RFC1918 addressing may be configured with stub zones
                        for
                        <literal>10.in-addr.arpa</literal>
                        to use a set of internal name servers as the
                        authoritative
                        servers for that domain.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        <varname>forward</varname>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        A "forward zone" is a way to configure
                        forwarding on a per-domain basis.  A <command>zone</command> statement
                        of type <command>forward</command> can
                        contain a <command>forward</command>
                        and/or <command>forwarders</command>
                        statement,
                        which will apply to queries within the domain given by
                        the zone
                        name. If no <command>forwarders</command>
                        statement is present or
                        an empty list for <command>forwarders</command> is given, then no
                        forwarding will be done for the domain, canceling the
                        effects of
                        any forwarders in the <command>options</command> statement. Thus
                        if you want to use this type of zone to change the
                        behavior of the
                        global <command>forward</command> option
                        (that is, "forward first"
                        to, then "forward only", or vice versa, but want to
                        use the same
                        servers as set globally) you need to re-specify the
                        global forwarders.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        <varname>hint</varname>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        The initial set of root name servers is
                        specified using a "hint zone". When the server starts
                        up, it uses
                        the root hints to find a root name server and get the
                        most recent
                        list of root name servers. If no hint zone is
                        specified for class
                        IN, the server uses a compiled-in default set of root
                        servers hints.
                        Classes other than IN have no built-in defaults hints.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        <varname>delegation-only</varname>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        This is used to enforce the delegation-only
                        status of infrastructure zones (e.g. COM, NET, ORG).
                        Any answer that
                        is received without an explicit or implicit delegation
                        in the authority
                        section will be treated as NXDOMAIN.  This does not
                        apply to the zone
                        apex.  This should not be applied to leaf zones.
                      </para>
                      <para>
                        <varname>delegation-only</varname> has no
                        effect on answers received
                        from forwarders.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                </tbody>
              </tgroup>
            </informaltable>
          </sect3>

          <sect3>
            <title>Class</title>
            <para>
              The zone's name may optionally be followed by a class. If
              a class is not specified, class <literal>IN</literal> (for <varname>Internet</varname>),
              is assumed. This is correct for the vast majority of cases.
            </para>
            <para>
              The <literal>hesiod</literal> class is
              named for an information service from MIT's Project Athena. It
              is
              used to share information about various systems databases, such
              as users, groups, printers and so on. The keyword
              <literal>HS</literal> is
              a synonym for hesiod.
            </para>
            <para>
              Another MIT development is CHAOSnet, a LAN protocol created
              in the mid-1970s. Zone data for it can be specified with the <literal>CHAOS</literal> class.
            </para>
          </sect3>
          <sect3>

            <title>Zone Options</title>

            <variablelist>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>allow-notify</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>allow-notify</command> in <xref linkend="access_control"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>allow-query</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>allow-query</command> in <xref linkend="access_control"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>allow-transfer</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of <command>allow-transfer</command>
                    in <xref linkend="access_control"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>allow-update</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of <command>allow-update</command>
                    in <xref linkend="access_control"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>update-policy</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    Specifies a "Simple Secure Update" policy. See
                    <xref linkend="dynamic_update_policies"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>allow-update-forwarding</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of <command>allow-update-forwarding</command>
                    in <xref linkend="access_control"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>also-notify</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    Only meaningful if <command>notify</command>
                    is
                    active for this zone. The set of machines that will
                    receive a
                    <literal>DNS NOTIFY</literal> message
                    for this zone is made up of all the listed name servers
                    (other than
                    the primary master) for the zone plus any IP addresses
                    specified
                    with <command>also-notify</command>. A port
                    may be specified
                    with each <command>also-notify</command>
                    address to send the notify
                    messages to a port other than the default of 53.
                    <command>also-notify</command> is not
                    meaningful for stub zones.
                    The default is the empty list.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>check-names</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    This option is used to restrict the character set and
                    syntax of
                    certain domain names in master files and/or DNS responses
                    received from the
                    network.  The default varies according to zone type.  For <command>master</command> zones the default is <command>fail</command>.  For <command>slave</command>
                    zones the default is <command>warn</command>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>check-mx</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>check-mx</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>check-wildcard</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>check-wildcard</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>check-integrity</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>check-integrity</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>check-sibling</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>check-sibling</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>zero-no-soa-ttl</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>zero-no-soa-ttl</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

	      <varlistentry>
	        <term><command>update-check-ksk</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>update-check-ksk</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>database</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    Specify the type of database to be used for storing the
                    zone data.  The string following the <command>database</command> keyword
                    is interpreted as a list of whitespace-delimited words.
                    The first word
                    identifies the database type, and any subsequent words are
                    passed
                    as arguments to the database to be interpreted in a way
                    specific
                    to the database type.
                  </para>
                  <para>
                    The default is <userinput>"rbt"</userinput>, BIND 9's
                    native in-memory
                    red-black-tree database.  This database does not take
                    arguments.
                  </para>
                  <para>
                    Other values are possible if additional database drivers
                    have been linked into the server.  Some sample drivers are
                    included
                    with the distribution but none are linked in by default.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>dialup</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>dialup</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>delegation-only</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    The flag only applies to hint and stub zones.  If set
                    to <userinput>yes</userinput>, then the zone will also be
                    treated as if it
                    is also a delegation-only type zone.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>forward</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    Only meaningful if the zone has a forwarders
                    list. The <command>only</command> value causes
                    the lookup to fail
                    after trying the forwarders and getting no answer, while <command>first</command> would
                    allow a normal lookup to be tried.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>forwarders</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    Used to override the list of global forwarders.
                    If it is not specified in a zone of type <command>forward</command>,
                    no forwarding is done for the zone and the global options are
                    not used.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>ixfr-base</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    Was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 to
                    specify the name
                    of the transaction log (journal) file for dynamic update
                    and IXFR.
                    <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 ignores the option
                    and constructs the name of the journal
                    file by appending "<filename>.jnl</filename>"
                    to the name of the
                    zone file.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>ixfr-tmp-file</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    Was an undocumented option in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8.
                    Ignored in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>journal</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    Allow the default journal's file name to be overridden.
                    The default is the zone's file with "<filename>.jnl</filename>" appended.
                    This is applicable to <command>master</command> and <command>slave</command> zones.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>max-transfer-time-in</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>max-transfer-time-in</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>max-transfer-idle-in</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>max-transfer-idle-in</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>max-transfer-time-out</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>max-transfer-time-out</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>max-transfer-idle-out</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>max-transfer-idle-out</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>notify</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>notify</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>pubkey</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8, this option was
                    intended for specifying
                    a public zone key for verification of signatures in DNSSEC
                    signed
                    zones when they are loaded from disk. <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 does not verify signatures
                    on load and ignores the option.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>zone-statistics</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    If <userinput>yes</userinput>, the server will keep
                    statistical
                    information for this zone, which can be dumped to the
                    <command>statistics-file</command> defined in
                    the server options.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>sig-validity-interval</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>sig-validity-interval</command> in <xref linkend="tuning"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>transfer-source</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>transfer-source</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>transfer-source-v6</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>transfer-source-v6</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>alt-transfer-source</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>alt-transfer-source</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>alt-transfer-source-v6</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>alt-transfer-source-v6</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>use-alt-transfer-source</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>use-alt-transfer-source</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>


              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>notify-source</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>notify-source</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>notify-source-v6</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>notify-source-v6</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>min-refresh-time</command></term>
                <term><command>max-refresh-time</command></term>
                <term><command>min-retry-time</command></term>
                <term><command>max-retry-time</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description in <xref linkend="tuning"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>ixfr-from-differences</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>ixfr-from-differences</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>key-directory</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of
                    <command>key-directory</command> in <xref linkend="options"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>

              <varlistentry>
                <term><command>multi-master</command></term>
                <listitem>
                  <para>
                    See the description of <command>multi-master</command> in
		    <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.
                  </para>
                </listitem>
              </varlistentry>
	
	      <varlistentry>
		<term><command>masterfile-format</command></term>
		<listitem>
		  <para>
		    See the description of <command>masterfile-format</command>
		    in <xref linkend="tuning"/>.
		  </para>
		</listitem>
	      </varlistentry>

            </variablelist>

          </sect3>
          <sect3 id="dynamic_update_policies">
            <title>Dynamic Update Policies</title>
            <para>
              <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 supports two alternative
              methods of granting clients
              the right to perform dynamic updates to a zone,
              configured by the <command>allow-update</command>
              and
              <command>update-policy</command> option,
              respectively.
            </para>
            <para>
              The <command>allow-update</command> clause works the
              same
              way as in previous versions of <acronym>BIND</acronym>. It grants given clients the
              permission to update any record of any name in the zone.
            </para>
            <para>
              The <command>update-policy</command> clause is new
              in <acronym>BIND</acronym>
              9 and allows more fine-grained control over what updates are
              allowed.
              A set of rules is specified, where each rule either grants or
              denies
              permissions for one or more names to be updated by one or more
              identities.
              If the dynamic update request message is signed (that is, it
              includes
              either a TSIG or SIG(0) record), the identity of the signer can
              be determined.
            </para>
            <para>
              Rules are specified in the <command>update-policy</command> zone
              option, and are only meaningful for master zones.  When the <command>update-policy</command> statement
              is present, it is a configuration error for the <command>allow-update</command> statement
              to be present.  The <command>update-policy</command>
              statement only
              examines the signer of a message; the source address is not
              relevant.
            </para>
            <para>
              This is how a rule definition looks:
            </para>

<programlisting>
( <command>grant</command> | <command>deny</command> ) <replaceable>identity</replaceable> <replaceable>nametype</replaceable> <replaceable>name</replaceable> <optional> <replaceable>types</replaceable> </optional>
</programlisting>

            <para>
              Each rule grants or denies privileges.  Once a message has
              successfully matched a rule, the operation is immediately
              granted
              or denied and no further rules are examined.  A rule is matched
              when the signer matches the identity field, the name matches the
              name field in accordance with the nametype field, and the type
              matches
              the types specified in the type field.
            </para>

            <para>
              The identity field specifies a name or a wildcard name.
              Normally, this
              is the name of the TSIG or SIG(0) key used to sign the update
              request.  When a
              TKEY exchange has been used to create a shared secret, the
              identity of the
              shared secret is the same as the identity of the key used to
              authenticate the
              TKEY exchange.  When the <replaceable>identity</replaceable> field specifies a
              wildcard name, it is subject to DNS wildcard expansion, so the
              rule will apply
              to multiple identities.  The <replaceable>identity</replaceable> field must
              contain a fully qualified domain name.
            </para>

            <para>
              The <replaceable>nametype</replaceable> field has 6
              values:
              <varname>name</varname>, <varname>subdomain</varname>,
              <varname>wildcard</varname>, <varname>self</varname>,
	       <varname>selfsub</varname>, and <varname>selfwild</varname>.
            </para>
            <informaltable>
              <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="4Level-table">
                <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="0.819in"/>
                <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="3.681in"/>
                <tbody>
		  <row rowsep="0">
		    <entry colname="1">
		      <para>
			<varname>name</varname>
		      </para>
		    </entry> <entry colname="2">
		      <para>
			Exact-match semantics.  This rule matches
			when the name being updated is identical
			to the contents of the
			<replaceable>name</replaceable> field.
		      </para>
		    </entry>
		  </row>
		  <row rowsep="0">
		    <entry colname="1">
		      <para>
			<varname>subdomain</varname>
		      </para>
		    </entry> <entry colname="2">
		      <para>
			This rule matches when the name being updated
			is a subdomain of, or identical to, the
			contents of the <replaceable>name</replaceable>
			field.
		      </para>
		    </entry>
		  </row>
		  <row rowsep="0">
		    <entry colname="1">
		      <para>
			<varname>wildcard</varname>
		      </para>
		    </entry> <entry colname="2">
		      <para>
			The <replaceable>name</replaceable> field
			is subject to DNS wildcard expansion, and
			this rule matches when the name being updated
			name is a valid expansion of the wildcard.
		      </para>
		    </entry>
		  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        <varname>self</varname>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
		      <para>
			This rule matches when the name being updated
			matches the contents of the
			<replaceable>identity</replaceable> field.
			The <replaceable>name</replaceable> field
			is ignored, but should be the same as the
			<replaceable>identity</replaceable> field.
			The <varname>self</varname> nametype is
			most useful when allowing using one key per
			name to update, where the key has the same
			name as the name to be updated.  The
			<replaceable>identity</replaceable> would
			be specified as <constant>*</constant> (an asterisk) in
			this case.
		      </para>
		    </entry>
		  </row>
		  <row rowsep="0">
		    <entry colname="1">
		      <para>
			<varname>selfsub</varname>
		      </para>
		    </entry> <entry colname="2">
		      <para>
			This rule is similar to <varname>self</varname>
			except that subdomains of <varname>self</varname>
			can also be updated.
		      </para>
		    </entry>
		  </row>
		  <row rowsep="0">
		    <entry colname="1">
		      <para>
			<varname>selfwild</varname>
		      </para>
		    </entry> <entry colname="2">
		      <para>
			This rule is similar to <varname>self</varname>
			except that only subdomains of
			<varname>self</varname> can be updated.
		      </para>
		    </entry>
		  </row>
                </tbody>
              </tgroup>
            </informaltable>

            <para>
              In all cases, the <replaceable>name</replaceable>
              field must
              specify a fully qualified domain name.
            </para>

            <para>
              If no types are explicitly specified, this rule matches all
              types except
              RRSIG, NS, SOA, and NSEC. Types may be specified by name, including
              "ANY" (ANY matches all types except NSEC, which can never be
              updated).
              Note that when an attempt is made to delete all records
              associated with a
              name, the rules are checked for each existing record type.
            </para>
          </sect3>
        </sect2>
      </sect1>
      <sect1>
        <title>Zone File</title>
        <sect2 id="types_of_resource_records_and_when_to_use_them">
          <title>Types of Resource Records and When to Use Them</title>
          <para>
            This section, largely borrowed from RFC 1034, describes the
            concept of a Resource Record (RR) and explains when each is used.
            Since the publication of RFC 1034, several new RRs have been
            identified
            and implemented in the DNS. These are also included.
          </para>
          <sect3>
            <title>Resource Records</title>

            <para>
              A domain name identifies a node.  Each node has a set of
              resource information, which may be empty.  The set of resource
              information associated with a particular name is composed of
              separate RRs. The order of RRs in a set is not significant and
              need not be preserved by name servers, resolvers, or other
              parts of the DNS. However, sorting of multiple RRs is
              permitted for optimization purposes, for example, to specify
              that a particular nearby server be tried first. See <xref linkend="the_sortlist_statement"/> and <xref linkend="rrset_ordering"/>.
            </para>

            <para>
              The components of a Resource Record are:
            </para>
            <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
              <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="4Level-table">
                <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.000in"/>
                <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="3.500in"/>
                <tbody>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        owner name
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        The domain name where the RR is found.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        type
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        An encoded 16-bit value that specifies
                        the type of the resource record.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        TTL
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        The time-to-live of the RR. This field
                        is a 32-bit integer in units of seconds, and is
                        primarily used by
                        resolvers when they cache RRs. The TTL describes how
                        long a RR can
                        be cached before it should be discarded.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        class
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        An encoded 16-bit value that identifies
                        a protocol family or instance of a protocol.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        RDATA
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        The resource data.  The format of the
                        data is type (and sometimes class) specific.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                </tbody>
              </tgroup>
            </informaltable>
            <para>
              The following are <emphasis>types</emphasis> of valid RRs:
            </para>
            <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
              <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="4Level-table">
                <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="0.875in"/>
                <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="3.625in"/>
                <tbody>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        A
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        A host address.  In the IN class, this is a
                        32-bit IP address.  Described in RFC 1035.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        AAAA
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        IPv6 address.  Described in RFC 1886.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        A6
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        IPv6 address.  This can be a partial
                        address (a suffix) and an indirection to the name
                        where the rest of the
                        address (the prefix) can be found.  Experimental.
                        Described in RFC 2874.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        AFSDB
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Location of AFS database servers.
                        Experimental.  Described in RFC 1183.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        APL
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Address prefix list.  Experimental.
                        Described in RFC 3123.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        CERT
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Holds a digital certificate.
                        Described in RFC 2538.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        CNAME
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Identifies the canonical name of an alias.
                        Described in RFC 1035.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        DNAME
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Replaces the domain name specified with
                        another name to be looked up, effectively aliasing an
                        entire
                        subtree of the domain name space rather than a single
                        record
                        as in the case of the CNAME RR.
                        Described in RFC 2672.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        DNSKEY
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Stores a public key associated with a signed
                        DNS zone.  Described in RFC 4034.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        DS
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Stores the hash of a public key associated with a
                        signed DNS zone.  Described in RFC 4034.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        GPOS
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Specifies the global position.  Superseded by LOC.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        HINFO
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Identifies the CPU and OS used by a host.
                        Described in RFC 1035.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        ISDN
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Representation of ISDN addresses.
                        Experimental.  Described in RFC 1183.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        KEY
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Stores a public key associated with a
                        DNS name.  Used in original DNSSEC; replaced
			by DNSKEY in DNSSECbis, but still used with
			SIG(0).  Described in RFCs 2535 and 2931.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        KX
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Identifies a key exchanger for this
                        DNS name.  Described in RFC 2230.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        LOC
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        For storing GPS info.  Described in RFC 1876.
                        Experimental.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        MX
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Identifies a mail exchange for the domain with
                        a 16-bit preference value (lower is better)
                        followed by the host name of the mail exchange.
                        Described in RFC 974, RFC 1035.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        NAPTR
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Name authority pointer.  Described in RFC 2915.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        NSAP
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        A network service access point.
                        Described in RFC 1706.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        NS
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        The authoritative name server for the
                        domain.  Described in RFC 1035.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        NSEC
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Used in DNSSECbis to securely indicate that
                        RRs with an owner name in a certain name interval do
                        not exist in
                        a zone and indicate what RR types are present for an
                        existing name.
                        Described in RFC 4034.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        NXT
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Used in DNSSEC to securely indicate that
                        RRs with an owner name in a certain name interval do
                        not exist in
                        a zone and indicate what RR types are present for an
                        existing name.
			Used in original DNSSEC; replaced by NSEC in
			DNSSECbis.
                        Described in RFC 2535.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        PTR
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        A pointer to another part of the domain
                        name space.  Described in RFC 1035.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        PX
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Provides mappings between RFC 822 and X.400
                        addresses.  Described in RFC 2163.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        RP
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Information on persons responsible
                        for the domain.  Experimental.  Described in RFC 1183.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        RRSIG
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Contains DNSSECbis signature data.  Described
			in RFC 4034.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        RT
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Route-through binding for hosts that
                        do not have their own direct wide area network
                        addresses.
                        Experimental.  Described in RFC 1183.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        SIG
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Contains DNSSEC signature data.  Used in
			original DNSSEC; replaced by RRSIG in
			DNSSECbis, but still used for SIG(0).
			Described in RFCs 2535 and 2931.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        SOA
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Identifies the start of a zone of authority.
                        Described in RFC 1035.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        SRV
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Information about well known network
                        services (replaces WKS).  Described in RFC 2782.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        TXT
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Text records.  Described in RFC 1035.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        WKS
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Information about which well known
                        network services, such as SMTP, that a domain
                        supports. Historical.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        X25
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Representation of X.25 network addresses.
                        Experimental.  Described in RFC 1183.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                </tbody>
              </tgroup>
            </informaltable>
            <para>
              The following <emphasis>classes</emphasis> of resource records
              are currently valid in the DNS:
            </para>
            <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0"><tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="4Level-table">
                <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="0.875in"/>
                <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="3.625in"/>
                <tbody>

                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        IN
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        The Internet.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>

                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        CH
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        CHAOSnet, a LAN protocol created at MIT in the
                        mid-1970s.
                        Rarely used for its historical purpose, but reused for
                        BIND's
                        built-in server information zones, e.g.,
                        <literal>version.bind</literal>.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>

                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        HS
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        Hesiod, an information service
                        developed by MIT's Project Athena. It is used to share
                        information
                        about various systems databases, such as users,
                        groups, printers
                        and so on.
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>

                </tbody>
              </tgroup>
            </informaltable>

            <para>
              The owner name is often implicit, rather than forming an
              integral
              part of the RR.  For example, many name servers internally form
              tree
              or hash structures for the name space, and chain RRs off nodes.
              The remaining RR parts are the fixed header (type, class, TTL)
              which is consistent for all RRs, and a variable part (RDATA)
              that
              fits the needs of the resource being described.
            </para>
            <para>
              The meaning of the TTL field is a time limit on how long an
              RR can be kept in a cache.  This limit does not apply to
              authoritative
              data in zones; it is also timed out, but by the refreshing
              policies
              for the zone.  The TTL is assigned by the administrator for the
              zone where the data originates.  While short TTLs can be used to
              minimize caching, and a zero TTL prohibits caching, the
              realities
              of Internet performance suggest that these times should be on
              the
              order of days for the typical host.  If a change can be
              anticipated,
              the TTL can be reduced prior to the change to minimize
              inconsistency
              during the change, and then increased back to its former value
              following
              the change.
            </para>
            <para>
              The data in the RDATA section of RRs is carried as a combination
              of binary strings and domain names.  The domain names are
              frequently
              used as "pointers" to other data in the DNS.
            </para>
          </sect3>
          <sect3>
            <title>Textual expression of RRs</title>
            <para>
              RRs are represented in binary form in the packets of the DNS
              protocol, and are usually represented in highly encoded form
              when
              stored in a name server or resolver.  In the examples provided
              in
              RFC 1034, a style similar to that used in master files was
              employed
              in order to show the contents of RRs.  In this format, most RRs
              are shown on a single line, although continuation lines are
              possible
              using parentheses.
            </para>
            <para>
              The start of the line gives the owner of the RR.  If a line
              begins with a blank, then the owner is assumed to be the same as
              that of the previous RR.  Blank lines are often included for
              readability.
            </para>
            <para>
              Following the owner, we list the TTL, type, and class of the
              RR.  Class and type use the mnemonics defined above, and TTL is
              an integer before the type field.  In order to avoid ambiguity
              in
              parsing, type and class mnemonics are disjoint, TTLs are
              integers,
              and the type mnemonic is always last. The IN class and TTL
              values
              are often omitted from examples in the interests of clarity.
            </para>
            <para>
              The resource data or RDATA section of the RR are given using
              knowledge of the typical representation for the data.
            </para>
            <para>
              For example, we might show the RRs carried in a message as:
            </para>
            <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0"><tgroup cols="3" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="4Level-table">
                <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.381in"/>
                <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="1.020in"/>
                <colspec colname="3" colnum="3" colsep="0" colwidth="2.099in"/>
                <tbody>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        <literal>ISI.EDU.</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        <literal>MX</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="3">
                      <para>
                        <literal>10 VENERA.ISI.EDU.</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para/>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        <literal>MX</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="3">
                      <para>
                        <literal>10 VAXA.ISI.EDU</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        <literal>VENERA.ISI.EDU</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        <literal>A</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="3">
                      <para>
                        <literal>128.9.0.32</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para/>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        <literal>A</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="3">
                      <para>
                        <literal>10.1.0.52</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        <literal>VAXA.ISI.EDU</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        <literal>A</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="3">
                      <para>
                        <literal>10.2.0.27</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para/>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        <literal>A</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="3">
                      <para>
                        <literal>128.9.0.33</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                </tbody>
              </tgroup>
            </informaltable>
            <para>
              The MX RRs have an RDATA section which consists of a 16-bit
              number followed by a domain name.  The address RRs use a
              standard
              IP address format to contain a 32-bit internet address.
            </para>
            <para>
              The above example shows six RRs, with two RRs at each of three
              domain names.
            </para>
            <para>
              Similarly we might see:
            </para>
            <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0"><tgroup cols="3" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="4Level-table">
                <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.491in"/>
                <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="1.067in"/>
                <colspec colname="3" colnum="3" colsep="0" colwidth="2.067in"/>
                <tbody>
                  <row rowsep="0">
                    <entry colname="1">
                      <para>
                        <literal>XX.LCS.MIT.EDU.</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        <literal>IN A</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="3">
                      <para>
                        <literal>10.0.0.44</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                  <row rowsep="0">
		    <entry colname="1"/>
                    <entry colname="2">
                      <para>
                        <literal>CH A</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                    <entry colname="3">
                      <para>
                        <literal>MIT.EDU. 2420</literal>
                      </para>
                    </entry>
                  </row>
                </tbody>
              </tgroup>
            </informaltable>
            <para>
              This example shows two addresses for
	      <literal>XX.LCS.MIT.EDU</literal>, each of a different class.
            </para>
          </sect3>
        </sect2>

        <sect2>
          <title>Discussion of MX Records</title>

          <para>
            As described above, domain servers store information as a
            series of resource records, each of which contains a particular
            piece of information about a given domain name (which is usually,
            but not always, a host). The simplest way to think of a RR is as
            a typed pair of data, a domain name matched with a relevant datum,
            and stored with some additional type information to help systems
            determine when the RR is relevant.
          </para>

          <para>
            MX records are used to control delivery of email. The data
            specified in the record is a priority and a domain name. The
            priority
            controls the order in which email delivery is attempted, with the
            lowest number first. If two priorities are the same, a server is
            chosen randomly. If no servers at a given priority are responding,
            the mail transport agent will fall back to the next largest
            priority.
            Priority numbers do not have any absolute meaning &mdash; they are
            relevant
            only respective to other MX records for that domain name. The
            domain
            name given is the machine to which the mail will be delivered.
	    It <emphasis>must</emphasis> have an associated address record
	    (A or AAAA) &mdash; CNAME is not sufficient.
          </para>
          <para>
            For a given domain, if there is both a CNAME record and an
            MX record, the MX record is in error, and will be ignored.
            Instead,
            the mail will be delivered to the server specified in the MX
            record
            pointed to by the CNAME.
          </para>
	  <para>
            For example:
          </para>
          <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <tgroup cols="5" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="3Level-table">
              <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.708in"/>
              <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="0.444in"/>
              <colspec colname="3" colnum="3" colsep="0" colwidth="0.444in"/>
              <colspec colname="4" colnum="4" colsep="0" colwidth="0.976in"/>
              <colspec colname="5" colnum="5" colsep="0" colwidth="1.553in"/>
              <tbody>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para>
                      <literal>example.com.</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      <literal>IN</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="3">
                    <para>
                      <literal>MX</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="4">
                    <para>
                      <literal>10</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="5">
                    <para>
                      <literal>mail.example.com.</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para/>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      <literal>IN</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="3">
                    <para>
                      <literal>MX</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="4">
                    <para>
                      <literal>10</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="5">
                    <para>
                      <literal>mail2.example.com.</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para/>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      <literal>IN</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="3">
                    <para>
                      <literal>MX</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="4">
                    <para>
                      <literal>20</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="5">
                    <para>
                      <literal>mail.backup.org.</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para>
                      <literal>mail.example.com.</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      <literal>IN</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="3">
                    <para>
                      <literal>A</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="4">
                    <para>
                      <literal>10.0.0.1</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="5">
                    <para/>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para>
                      <literal>mail2.example.com.</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      <literal>IN</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="3">
                    <para>
                      <literal>A</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="4">
                    <para>
                      <literal>10.0.0.2</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="5">
                    <para/>
                  </entry>
                </row>
              </tbody>
            </tgroup>
            </informaltable><para>
            Mail delivery will be attempted to <literal>mail.example.com</literal> and
            <literal>mail2.example.com</literal> (in
            any order), and if neither of those succeed, delivery to <literal>mail.backup.org</literal> will
            be attempted.
          </para>
        </sect2>
        <sect2 id="Setting_TTLs">
          <title>Setting TTLs</title>
          <para>
            The time-to-live of the RR field is a 32-bit integer represented
            in units of seconds, and is primarily used by resolvers when they
            cache RRs. The TTL describes how long a RR can be cached before it
            should be discarded. The following three types of TTL are
            currently
            used in a zone file.
          </para>
          <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="3Level-table">
              <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="0.750in"/>
              <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="4.375in"/>
              <tbody>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para>
                      SOA
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      The last field in the SOA is the negative
                      caching TTL. This controls how long other servers will
                      cache no-such-domain
                      (NXDOMAIN) responses from you.
                    </para>
                    <para>
                      The maximum time for
                      negative caching is 3 hours (3h).
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para>
                      $TTL
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      The $TTL directive at the top of the
                      zone file (before the SOA) gives a default TTL for every
                      RR without
                      a specific TTL set.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para>
                      RR TTLs
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      Each RR can have a TTL as the second
                      field in the RR, which will control how long other
                      servers can cache
                      the it.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
              </tbody>
            </tgroup>
          </informaltable>
          <para>
            All of these TTLs default to units of seconds, though units
            can be explicitly specified, for example, <literal>1h30m</literal>.
          </para>
        </sect2>
        <sect2>
          <title>Inverse Mapping in IPv4</title>
          <para>
            Reverse name resolution (that is, translation from IP address
            to name) is achieved by means of the <emphasis>in-addr.arpa</emphasis> domain
            and PTR records. Entries in the in-addr.arpa domain are made in
            least-to-most significant order, read left to right. This is the
            opposite order to the way IP addresses are usually written. Thus,
            a machine with an IP address of 10.1.2.3 would have a
            corresponding
            in-addr.arpa name of
            3.2.1.10.in-addr.arpa. This name should have a PTR resource record
            whose data field is the name of the machine or, optionally,
            multiple
            PTR records if the machine has more than one name. For example,
            in the <optional>example.com</optional> domain:
          </para>
          <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="3Level-table">
              <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="1.125in"/>
              <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="4.000in"/>
              <tbody>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para>
                      <literal>$ORIGIN</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      <literal>2.1.10.in-addr.arpa</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para>
                      <literal>3</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      <literal>IN PTR foo.example.com.</literal>
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
              </tbody>
            </tgroup>
          </informaltable>
          <note>
            <para>
              The <command>$ORIGIN</command> lines in the examples
              are for providing context to the examples only-they do not
              necessarily
              appear in the actual usage. They are only used here to indicate
              that the example is relative to the listed origin.
            </para>
          </note>
        </sect2>
        <sect2>
          <title>Other Zone File Directives</title>
          <para>
            The Master File Format was initially defined in RFC 1035 and
            has subsequently been extended. While the Master File Format
            itself
            is class independent all records in a Master File must be of the
            same
            class.
          </para>
          <para>
            Master File Directives include <command>$ORIGIN</command>, <command>$INCLUDE</command>,
            and <command>$TTL.</command>
          </para>
          <sect3>
            <title>The <command>$ORIGIN</command> Directive</title>
            <para>
              Syntax: <command>$ORIGIN</command>
	      <replaceable>domain-name</replaceable>
              <optional><replaceable>comment</replaceable></optional>
            </para>
            <para><command>$ORIGIN</command>
	      sets the domain name that will be appended to any
              unqualified records. When a zone is first read in there
              is an implicit <command>$ORIGIN</command>
              &lt;<varname>zone-name</varname>&gt;<command>.</command>
              The current <command>$ORIGIN</command> is appended to
              the domain specified in the <command>$ORIGIN</command>
              argument if it is not absolute.
            </para>

<programlisting>
$ORIGIN example.com.
WWW     CNAME   MAIN-SERVER
</programlisting>

            <para>
              is equivalent to
            </para>

<programlisting>
WWW.EXAMPLE.COM. CNAME MAIN-SERVER.EXAMPLE.COM.
</programlisting>

          </sect3>
          <sect3>
            <title>The <command>$INCLUDE</command> Directive</title>
            <para>
              Syntax: <command>$INCLUDE</command>
              <replaceable>filename</replaceable>
              <optional>
<replaceable>origin</replaceable> </optional>
              <optional> <replaceable>comment</replaceable> </optional>
            </para>
            <para>
              Read and process the file <filename>filename</filename> as
              if it were included into the file at this point.  If <command>origin</command> is
              specified the file is processed with <command>$ORIGIN</command> set
              to that value, otherwise the current <command>$ORIGIN</command> is
              used.
            </para>
            <para>
              The origin and the current domain name
              revert to the values they had prior to the <command>$INCLUDE</command> once
              the file has been read.
            </para>
            <note>
              <para>
                RFC 1035 specifies that the current origin should be restored
                after
                an <command>$INCLUDE</command>, but it is silent
                on whether the current
                domain name should also be restored.  BIND 9 restores both of
                them.
                This could be construed as a deviation from RFC 1035, a
                feature, or both.
              </para>
            </note>
          </sect3>
          <sect3>
            <title>The <command>$TTL</command> Directive</title>
            <para>
              Syntax: <command>$TTL</command>
              <replaceable>default-ttl</replaceable>
              <optional>
<replaceable>comment</replaceable> </optional>
            </para>
            <para>
              Set the default Time To Live (TTL) for subsequent records
              with undefined TTLs. Valid TTLs are of the range 0-2147483647
              seconds.
            </para>
            <para><command>$TTL</command>
	       is defined in RFC 2308.
            </para>
          </sect3>
        </sect2>
        <sect2>
          <title><acronym>BIND</acronym> Master File Extension: the  <command>$GENERATE</command> Directive</title>
          <para>
            Syntax: <command>$GENERATE</command>
	    <replaceable>range</replaceable>
	    <replaceable>lhs</replaceable>
            <optional><replaceable>ttl</replaceable></optional>
            <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable></optional>
	    <replaceable>type</replaceable>
	    <replaceable>rhs</replaceable>
            <optional><replaceable>comment</replaceable></optional>
          </para>
          <para><command>$GENERATE</command>
	    is used to create a series of resource records that only
            differ from each other by an
            iterator. <command>$GENERATE</command> can be used to
            easily generate the sets of records required to support
            sub /24 reverse delegations described in RFC 2317:
            Classless IN-ADDR.ARPA delegation.
          </para>

<programlisting>$ORIGIN 0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
$GENERATE 1-2 0 NS SERVER$.EXAMPLE.
$GENERATE 1-127 $ CNAME $.0</programlisting>

          <para>
            is equivalent to
          </para>

<programlisting>0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA NS SERVER1.EXAMPLE.
0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. NS SERVER2.EXAMPLE.
1.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 1.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
2.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 2.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
...
127.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 127.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
</programlisting>

          <informaltable colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" tgroupstyle="3Level-table">
                        <colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colsep="0" colwidth="0.875in"/>
              <colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colsep="0" colwidth="4.250in"/>
              <tbody>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>range</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      This can be one of two forms: start-stop
                      or start-stop/step. If the first form is used, then step
                      is set to
                      1. All of start, stop and step must be positive.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>lhs</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para><command>lhs</command>
		      describes the owner name of the resource records
                      to be created.  Any single <command>$</command>
                      (dollar sign)
                      symbols within the <command>lhs</command> side
                      are replaced by the iterator value.

                      To get a $ in the output you need to escape the
                      <command>$</command> using a backslash
                      <command>\</command>,
                      e.g. <command>\$</command>. The
                      <command>$</command> may optionally be followed
                      by modifiers which change the offset from the
                      iterator, field width and base.

                      Modifiers are introduced by a
                      <command>{</command> immediately following the
                      <command>$</command> as
                      <command>${offset[,width[,base]]}</command>.
                      For example, <command>${-20,3,d}</command>
                      subtracts 20 from the current value, prints the
                      result as a decimal in a zero-padded field of
                      width 3.

		      Available output forms are decimal
                      (<command>d</command>), octal
                      (<command>o</command>) and hexadecimal
                      (<command>x</command> or <command>X</command>
                      for uppercase).  The default modifier is
                      <command>${0,0,d}</command>.  If the
                      <command>lhs</command> is not absolute, the
                      current <command>$ORIGIN</command> is appended
                      to the name.
                    </para>
                    <para>
                      For compatibility with earlier versions, <command>$$</command> is still
                      recognized as indicating a literal $ in the output.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>ttl</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
		      Specifies the time-to-live of the generated records. If
                      not specified this will be inherited using the
                      normal ttl inheritance rules.
                    </para>
                    <para><command>class</command>
		      and <command>ttl</command> can be
                      entered in either order.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>class</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
		      Specifies the class of the generated records.
                      This must match the zone class if it is
                      specified.
                    </para>
                    <para><command>class</command>
		      and <command>ttl</command> can be
                      entered in either order.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>type</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      At present the only supported types are
                      PTR, CNAME, DNAME, A, AAAA and NS.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
                <row rowsep="0">
                  <entry colname="1">
                    <para><command>rhs</command></para>
                  </entry>
                  <entry colname="2">
                    <para>
                      A domain name. It is processed
                      similarly to lhs.
                    </para>
                  </entry>
                </row>
              </tbody>
            </tgroup>
          </informaltable>
          <para>
            The <command>$GENERATE</command> directive is a <acronym>BIND</acronym> extension
            and not part of the standard zone file format.
          </para>
          <para>
            BIND 8 does not support the optional TTL and CLASS fields.
          </para>
        </sect2>

	<sect2 id="zonefile_format">
	  <title>Additional File Formats</title>
	  <para>
	    In addition to the standard textual format, BIND 9
	    supports the ability to read or dump to zone files in
	    other formats.  The <constant>raw</constant> format is
	    currently available as an additional format.  It is a
	    binary format representing BIND 9's internal data
	    structure directly, thereby remarkably improving the
	    loading time.
	  </para>
	  <para>
	    For a primary server, a zone file in the
	    <constant>raw</constant> format is expected to be
	    generated from a textual zone file by the
	    <command>named-compilezone</command> command.  For a
	    secondary server or for a dynamic zone, it is automatically
	    generated (if this format is specified by the
	    <command>masterfile-format</command> option) when
	    <command>named</command> dumps the zone contents after
	    zone transfer or when applying prior updates.
	  </para>
	  <para>
	    If a zone file in a binary format needs manual modification,
	    it first must be converted to a textual form by the
	    <command>named-compilezone</command> command.  All
	    necessary modification should go to the text file, which
	    should then be converted to the binary form by the
	    <command>named-compilezone</command> command again.
	  </para>
    	  <para>
	     Although the <constant>raw</constant> format uses the
	     network byte order and avoids architecture-dependent
	     data alignment so that it is as much portable as
	     possible, it is primarily expected to be used inside
	     the same single system.  In order to export a zone
	     file in the <constant>raw</constant> format or make a
	     portable backup of the file, it is recommended to
	     convert the file to the standard textual representation.
	  </para>
	</sect2>
      </sect1>
    </chapter>
    <chapter id="Bv9ARM.ch07">
      <title><acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 Security Considerations</title>
      <sect1 id="Access_Control_Lists">
        <title>Access Control Lists</title>
        <para>
          Access Control Lists (ACLs), are address match lists that
          you can set up and nickname for future use in <command>allow-notify</command>,
          <command>allow-query</command>, <command>allow-recursion</command>,
          <command>blackhole</command>, <command>allow-transfer</command>,
          etc.
        </para>
        <para>
          Using ACLs allows you to have finer control over who can access
          your name server, without cluttering up your config files with huge
          lists of IP addresses.
        </para>
        <para>
          It is a <emphasis>good idea</emphasis> to use ACLs, and to
          control access to your server. Limiting access to your server by
          outside parties can help prevent spoofing and denial of service (DoS) attacks against
          your server.
        </para>
        <para>
          Here is an example of how to properly apply ACLs:
        </para>

<programlisting>
// Set up an ACL named "bogusnets" that will block RFC1918 space
// and some reserved space, which is commonly used in spoofing attacks.
acl bogusnets {
	0.0.0.0/8; 1.0.0.0/8; 2.0.0.0/8; 192.0.2.0/24; 224.0.0.0/3;
	10.0.0.0/8; 172.16.0.0/12; 192.168.0.0/16;
};

// Set up an ACL called our-nets. Replace this with the real IP numbers.
acl our-nets { x.x.x.x/24; x.x.x.x/21; };
options {
  ...
  ...
  allow-query { our-nets; };
  allow-recursion { our-nets; };
  ...
  blackhole { bogusnets; };
  ...
};

zone "example.com" {
  type master;
  file "m/example.com";
  allow-query { any; };
};
</programlisting>

        <para>
          This allows recursive queries of the server from the outside
          unless recursion has been previously disabled.
        </para>
        <para>
          For more information on how to use ACLs to protect your server,
          see the <emphasis>AUSCERT</emphasis> advisory at:
        </para>
        <para>
          <ulink url="ftp://ftp.auscert.org.au/pub/auscert/advisory/AL-1999.004.dns_dos"
	             >ftp://ftp.auscert.org.au/pub/auscert/advisory/AL-1999.004.dns_dos</ulink>
        </para>
      </sect1>
      <sect1>
        <title><command>chroot</command> and <command>setuid</command></title>
        <para>
          On UNIX servers, it is possible to run <acronym>BIND</acronym> in a <emphasis>chrooted</emphasis> environment
          (using the <command>chroot()</command> function) by specifying the "<option>-t</option>"
          option. This can help improve system security by placing <acronym>BIND</acronym> in
          a "sandbox", which will limit the damage done if a server is
          compromised.
        </para>
        <para>
          Another useful feature in the UNIX version of <acronym>BIND</acronym> is the
          ability to run the daemon as an unprivileged user ( <option>-u</option> <replaceable>user</replaceable> ).
          We suggest running as an unprivileged user when using the <command>chroot</command> feature.
        </para>
        <para>
          Here is an example command line to load <acronym>BIND</acronym> in a <command>chroot</command> sandbox,
          <command>/var/named</command>, and to run <command>named</command> <command>setuid</command> to
          user 202:
        </para>
        <para>
          <userinput>/usr/local/bin/named -u 202 -t /var/named</userinput>
        </para>

        <sect2>
          <title>The <command>chroot</command> Environment</title>

          <para>
            In order for a <command>chroot</command> environment
            to
            work properly in a particular directory
            (for example, <filename>/var/named</filename>),
            you will need to set up an environment that includes everything
            <acronym>BIND</acronym> needs to run.
            From <acronym>BIND</acronym>'s point of view, <filename>/var/named</filename> is
            the root of the filesystem.  You will need to adjust the values of
            options like
            like <command>directory</command> and <command>pid-file</command> to account
            for this.
          </para>
          <para>
            Unlike with earlier versions of BIND, you will typically
            <emphasis>not</emphasis> need to compile <command>named</command>
            statically nor install shared libraries under the new root.
            However, depending on your operating system, you may need
            to set up things like
            <filename>/dev/zero</filename>,
            <filename>/dev/random</filename>,
            <filename>/dev/log</filename>, and
            <filename>/etc/localtime</filename>.
          </para>
        </sect2>

        <sect2>
          <title>Using the <command>setuid</command> Function</title>

          <para>
            Prior to running the <command>named</command> daemon,
            use
            the <command>touch</command> utility (to change file
            access and
            modification times) or the <command>chown</command>
            utility (to
            set the user id and/or group id) on files
            to which you want <acronym>BIND</acronym>
            to write.
          </para>
	  <note>
	    Note that if the <command>named</command> daemon is running as an
            unprivileged user, it will not be able to bind to new restricted
            ports if the server is reloaded.
	  </note>
        </sect2>
      </sect1>

      <sect1 id="dynamic_update_security">
        <title>Dynamic Update Security</title>

        <para>
          Access to the dynamic
          update facility should be strictly limited.  In earlier versions of
          <acronym>BIND</acronym>, the only way to do this was
          based on the IP
          address of the host requesting the update, by listing an IP address
          or
          network prefix in the <command>allow-update</command>
          zone option.
          This method is insecure since the source address of the update UDP
          packet
          is easily forged.  Also note that if the IP addresses allowed by the
          <command>allow-update</command> option include the
          address of a slave
          server which performs forwarding of dynamic updates, the master can
          be
          trivially attacked by sending the update to the slave, which will
          forward it to the master with its own source IP address causing the
          master to approve it without question.
        </para>

        <para>
          For these reasons, we strongly recommend that updates be
          cryptographically authenticated by means of transaction signatures
          (TSIG).  That is, the <command>allow-update</command>
          option should
          list only TSIG key names, not IP addresses or network
          prefixes. Alternatively, the new <command>update-policy</command>
          option can be used.
        </para>

        <para>
          Some sites choose to keep all dynamically-updated DNS data
          in a subdomain and delegate that subdomain to a separate zone. This
          way, the top-level zone containing critical data such as the IP
          addresses
          of public web and mail servers need not allow dynamic update at
          all.
        </para>

      </sect1>
    </chapter>

    <chapter id="Bv9ARM.ch08">
      <title>Troubleshooting</title>
      <sect1>
        <title>Common Problems</title>
        <sect2>
          <title>It's not working; how can I figure out what's wrong?</title>

          <para>
            The best solution to solving installation and
            configuration issues is to take preventative measures by setting
            up logging files beforehand. The log files provide a
            source of hints and information that can be used to figure out
            what went wrong and how to fix the problem.
          </para>

        </sect2>
      </sect1>
      <sect1>
        <title>Incrementing and Changing the Serial Number</title>

        <para>
          Zone serial numbers are just numbers-they aren't date
          related.  A lot of people set them to a number that represents a
          date, usually of the form YYYYMMDDRR. A number of people have been
          testing these numbers for Y2K compliance and have set the number
          to the year 2000 to see if it will work. They then try to restore
          the old serial number. This will cause problems because serial
          numbers are used to indicate that a zone has been updated. If the
          serial number on the slave server is lower than the serial number
          on the master, the slave server will attempt to update its copy of
          the zone.
        </para>

        <para>
          Setting the serial number to a lower number on the master
          server than the slave server means that the slave will not perform
          updates to its copy of the zone.
        </para>

        <para>
          The solution to this is to add 2147483647 (2^31-1) to the
          number, reload the zone and make sure all slaves have updated to
          the new zone serial number, then reset the number to what you want
          it to be, and reload the zone again.
        </para>

      </sect1>
      <sect1>
        <title>Where Can I Get Help?</title>

        <para>
          The Internet Systems Consortium
          (<acronym>ISC</acronym>) offers a wide range
          of support and service agreements for <acronym>BIND</acronym> and <acronym>DHCP</acronym> servers. Four
          levels of premium support are available and each level includes
          support for all <acronym>ISC</acronym> programs,
          significant discounts on products
          and training, and a recognized priority on bug fixes and
          non-funded feature requests. In addition, <acronym>ISC</acronym> offers a standard
          support agreement package which includes services ranging from bug
          fix announcements to remote support. It also includes training in
          <acronym>BIND</acronym> and <acronym>DHCP</acronym>.
        </para>

        <para>
          To discuss arrangements for support, contact
          <ulink url="mailto:info@isc.org">info@isc.org</ulink> or visit the
          <acronym>ISC</acronym> web page at
	  <ulink url="http://www.isc.org/services/support/"
	             >http://www.isc.org/services/support/</ulink>
          to read more.
        </para>
      </sect1>
    </chapter>
    <appendix id="Bv9ARM.ch09">
      <title>Appendices</title>
      <sect1>
        <title>Acknowledgments</title>
        <sect2 id="historical_dns_information">
          <title>A Brief History of the <acronym>DNS</acronym> and <acronym>BIND</acronym></title>

          <para>
            Although the "official" beginning of the Domain Name
            System occurred in 1984 with the publication of RFC 920, the
            core of the new system was described in 1983 in RFCs 882 and
            883. From 1984 to 1987, the ARPAnet (the precursor to today's
            Internet) became a testbed of experimentation for developing the
            new naming/addressing scheme in a rapidly expanding,
            operational network environment.  New RFCs were written and
            published in 1987 that modified the original documents to
            incorporate improvements based on the working model. RFC 1034,
            "Domain Names-Concepts and Facilities", and RFC 1035, "Domain
            Names-Implementation and Specification" were published and
            became the standards upon which all <acronym>DNS</acronym> implementations are
            built.
          </para>

          <para>
            The first working domain name server, called "Jeeves", was
            written in 1983-84 by Paul Mockapetris for operation on DEC
            Tops-20
            machines located at the University of Southern California's
            Information
            Sciences Institute (USC-ISI) and SRI International's Network
            Information
            Center (SRI-NIC). A <acronym>DNS</acronym> server for
            Unix machines, the Berkeley Internet
            Name Domain (<acronym>BIND</acronym>) package, was
            written soon after by a group of
            graduate students at the University of California at Berkeley
            under
            a grant from the US Defense Advanced Research Projects
            Administration
            (DARPA).
          </para>
          <para>
	    Versions of <acronym>BIND</acronym> through
            4.8.3 were maintained by the Computer
            Systems Research Group (CSRG) at UC Berkeley. Douglas Terry, Mark
            Painter, David Riggle and Songnian Zhou made up the initial <acronym>BIND</acronym>
            project team. After that, additional work on the software package
            was done by Ralph Campbell. Kevin Dunlap, a Digital Equipment
            Corporation
            employee on loan to the CSRG, worked on <acronym>BIND</acronym> for 2 years, from 1985
            to 1987. Many other people also contributed to <acronym>BIND</acronym> development
            during that time: Doug Kingston, Craig Partridge, Smoot
            Carl-Mitchell,
            Mike Muuss, Jim Bloom and Mike Schwartz. <acronym>BIND</acronym> maintenance was subsequently
            handled by Mike Karels and O. Kure.
          </para>
          <para>
            <acronym>BIND</acronym> versions 4.9 and 4.9.1 were
            released by Digital Equipment
            Corporation (now Compaq Computer Corporation). Paul Vixie, then
            a DEC employee, became <acronym>BIND</acronym>'s
            primary caretaker. He was assisted
            by Phil Almquist, Robert Elz, Alan Barrett, Paul Albitz, Bryan
            Beecher, Andrew
            Partan, Andy Cherenson, Tom Limoncelli, Berthold Paffrath, Fuat
            Baran, Anant Kumar, Art Harkin, Win Treese, Don Lewis, Christophe
            Wolfhugel, and others.
          </para>
          <para>
            <acronym>BIND</acronym> version 4.9.2 was sponsored by
            Vixie Enterprises. Paul
            Vixie became <acronym>BIND</acronym>'s principal
            architect/programmer.
          </para>
          <para>
            <acronym>BIND</acronym> versions from 4.9.3 onward
            have been developed and maintained
            by the Internet Systems Consortium and its predecessor,
            the Internet Software Consortium,  with support being provided
            by ISC's sponsors. As co-architects/programmers, Bob Halley and
            Paul Vixie released the first production-ready version of
	    <acronym>BIND</acronym> version 8 in May 1997.
          </para>
          <para>
            <acronym>BIND</acronym> development work is made
            possible today by the sponsorship
            of several corporations, and by the tireless work efforts of
            numerous individuals.
          </para>
        </sect2>
      </sect1>
      <sect1>
        <title>General <acronym>DNS</acronym> Reference Information</title>
        <sect2 id="ipv6addresses">
          <title>IPv6 addresses (AAAA)</title>
          <para>
            IPv6 addresses are 128-bit identifiers for interfaces and
            sets of interfaces which were introduced in the <acronym>DNS</acronym> to facilitate
            scalable Internet routing. There are three types of addresses: <emphasis>Unicast</emphasis>,
            an identifier for a single interface;
            <emphasis>Anycast</emphasis>,
            an identifier for a set of interfaces; and <emphasis>Multicast</emphasis>,
            an identifier for a set of interfaces. Here we describe the global
            Unicast address scheme. For more information, see RFC 3587.
          </para>
          <para>
	    IPv6 unicast addresses consist of a
	    <emphasis>global routing prefix</emphasis>, a
	    <emphasis>subnet identifier</emphasis>, and an
	    <emphasis>interface identifier</emphasis>.
          </para>
          <para>
            The global routing prefix is provided by the
            upstream provider or ISP, and (roughly) corresponds to the
	    IPv4 <emphasis>network</emphasis> section
            of the address range.

	    The subnet identifier is for local subnetting, much the
            same as subnetting an
            IPv4 /16 network into /24 subnets.

	    The interface identifier is the address of an individual
            interface on a given network; in IPv6, addresses belong to
            interfaces rather than to machines.
          </para>
          <para>
            The subnetting capability of IPv6 is much more flexible than
            that of IPv4: subnetting can be carried out on bit boundaries,
            in much the same way as Classless InterDomain Routing
            (CIDR), and the DNS PTR representation ("nibble" format)
            makes setting up reverse zones easier.
          </para>
          <para>
            The Interface Identifier must be unique on the local link,
            and is usually generated automatically by the IPv6
            implementation, although it is usually possible to
            override the default setting if necessary.  A typical IPv6
            address might look like:
	    <command>2001:db8:201:9:a00:20ff:fe81:2b32</command>
	  </para>
          <para>
            IPv6 address specifications often contain long strings
            of zeros, so the architects have included a shorthand for
            specifying
            them. The double colon (`::') indicates the longest possible
            string
            of zeros that can fit, and can be used only once in an address.
          </para>
        </sect2>
      </sect1>
      <sect1 id="bibliography">
        <title>Bibliography (and Suggested Reading)</title>
        <sect2 id="rfcs">
          <title>Request for Comments (RFCs)</title>
          <para>
            Specification documents for the Internet protocol suite, including
            the <acronym>DNS</acronym>, are published as part of
            the Request for Comments (RFCs)
            series of technical notes. The standards themselves are defined
            by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and the Internet
            Engineering Steering Group (IESG). RFCs can be obtained online via FTP at:
	  </para>
	  <para>
            <ulink url="ftp://www.isi.edu/in-notes/">
	      ftp://www.isi.edu/in-notes/RFC<replaceable>xxxx</replaceable>.txt
	    </ulink>
	  </para>
	  <para>
	    (where <replaceable>xxxx</replaceable> is
            the number of the RFC). RFCs are also available via the Web at:
	  </para>
	  <para>
            <ulink url="http://www.ietf.org/rfc/"
	               >http://www.ietf.org/rfc/</ulink>.
          </para>
          <bibliography>
            <bibliodiv>
              <!-- one of (BIBLIOENTRY BIBLIOMIXED) -->
              <title>Standards</title>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC974</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Partridge</surname>
                  <firstname>C.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Mail Routing and the Domain System</title>
                <pubdate>January 1986</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1034</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Mockapetris</surname>
                  <firstname>P.V.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Domain Names &mdash; Concepts and Facilities</title>
                <pubdate>November 1987</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1035</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Mockapetris</surname>
                  <firstname>P. V.</firstname>
                  </author> <title>Domain Names &mdash; Implementation and
                  Specification</title>
                <pubdate>November 1987</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
            </bibliodiv>
            <bibliodiv id="proposed_standards" xreflabel="Proposed Standards">

              <title>Proposed Standards</title>
              <!-- one of (BIBLIOENTRY BIBLIOMIXED) -->
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2181</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Elz</surname>
                  <firstname>R., R. Bush</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Clarifications to the <acronym>DNS</acronym>
                  Specification</title>
                <pubdate>July 1997</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2308</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Andrews</surname>
                  <firstname>M.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Negative Caching of <acronym>DNS</acronym>
                  Queries</title>
                <pubdate>March 1998</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1995</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Ohta</surname>
                  <firstname>M.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Incremental Zone Transfer in <acronym>DNS</acronym></title>
                <pubdate>August 1996</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1996</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Vixie</surname>
                  <firstname>P.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>A Mechanism for Prompt Notification of Zone Changes</title>
                <pubdate>August 1996</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2136</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Vixie</surname>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>S.</firstname>
                    <surname>Thomson</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>Y.</firstname>
                    <surname>Rekhter</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>J.</firstname>
                    <surname>Bound</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Dynamic Updates in the Domain Name System</title>
                <pubdate>April 1997</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
	      <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2671</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                    <surname>Vixie</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Extension Mechanisms for DNS (EDNS0)</title>
                <pubdate>August 1997</pubdate>
	      </biblioentry>
	      <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2672</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>M.</firstname>
                    <surname>Crawford</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Non-Terminal DNS Name Redirection</title>
                <pubdate>August 1999</pubdate>
	      </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2845</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Vixie</surname>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>O.</firstname>
                    <surname>Gudmundsson</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                    <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                    <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>B.</firstname>
                    <surname>Wellington</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Secret Key Transaction Authentication for <acronym>DNS</acronym> (TSIG)</title>
                <pubdate>May 2000</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2930</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                    <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                    <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Secret Key Establishment for DNS (TKEY RR)</title>
                <pubdate>September 2000</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2931</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                    <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                    <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>DNS Request and Transaction Signatures (SIG(0)s)</title>
                <pubdate>September 2000</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3007</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>B.</firstname>
                    <surname>Wellington</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Secure Domain Name System (DNS) Dynamic Update</title>
                <pubdate>November 2000</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3645</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>S.</firstname>
                    <surname>Kwan</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                    <surname>Garg</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>J.</firstname>
                    <surname>Gilroy</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>L.</firstname>
                    <surname>Esibov</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>J.</firstname>
                    <surname>Westhead</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>R.</firstname>
                    <surname>Hall</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Generic Security Service Algorithm for Secret
		       Key Transaction Authentication for DNS
		       (GSS-TSIG)</title>
                <pubdate>October 2003</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
            </bibliodiv>
	    <bibliodiv>
	      <title><acronym>DNS</acronym> Security Proposed Standards</title>
	      <biblioentry>
		<abbrev>RFC3225</abbrev>
	 	<authorgroup>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>D.</firstname>
		    <surname>Conrad</surname>
		  </author>
	 	</authorgroup>
		<title>Indicating Resolver Support of DNSSEC</title>
		<pubdate>December 2001</pubdate>
	      </biblioentry>
	      <biblioentry>
	        <abbrev>RFC3833</abbrev>
	 	<authorgroup>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>D.</firstname>
		    <surname>Atkins</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>R.</firstname>
		    <surname>Austein</surname>
		  </author>
		</authorgroup>
		<title>Threat Analysis of the Domain Name System (DNS)</title>
		<pubdate>August 2004</pubdate>
	      </biblioentry>
	      <biblioentry>
	        <abbrev>RFC4033</abbrev>
	 	<authorgroup>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>R.</firstname>
		    <surname>Arends</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>R.</firstname>
		    <surname>Austein</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>M.</firstname>
		    <surname>Larson</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>D.</firstname>
		    <surname>Massey</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>S.</firstname>
		    <surname>Rose</surname>
		  </author>
		</authorgroup>
		<title>DNS Security Introduction and Requirements</title>
		<pubdate>March 2005</pubdate>
	      </biblioentry>
	      <biblioentry>
	        <abbrev>RFC4044</abbrev>
	 	<authorgroup>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>R.</firstname>
		    <surname>Arends</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>R.</firstname>
		    <surname>Austein</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>M.</firstname>
		    <surname>Larson</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>D.</firstname>
		    <surname>Massey</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>S.</firstname>
		    <surname>Rose</surname>
		  </author>
		</authorgroup>
		<title>Resource Records for the DNS Security Extensions</title>
		<pubdate>March 2005</pubdate>
	      </biblioentry>
	      <biblioentry>
	        <abbrev>RFC4035</abbrev>
	 	<authorgroup>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>R.</firstname>
		    <surname>Arends</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>R.</firstname>
		    <surname>Austein</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>M.</firstname>
		    <surname>Larson</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>D.</firstname>
		    <surname>Massey</surname>
		  </author>
		  <author>
		    <firstname>S.</firstname>
		    <surname>Rose</surname>
		  </author>
		</authorgroup>
		<title>Protocol Modifications for the DNS
		       Security Extensions</title>
		<pubdate>March 2005</pubdate>
	      </biblioentry>
            </bibliodiv>
            <bibliodiv>
              <title>Other Important RFCs About <acronym>DNS</acronym>
                Implementation</title>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1535</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Gavron</surname>
                  <firstname>E.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>A Security Problem and Proposed Correction With Widely
                  Deployed <acronym>DNS</acronym> Software.</title>
                <pubdate>October 1993</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1536</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Kumar</surname>
                    <firstname>A.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>J.</firstname>
                    <surname>Postel</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>C.</firstname>
                    <surname>Neuman</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                    <surname>Danzig</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>S.</firstname>
                    <surname>Miller</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Common <acronym>DNS</acronym> Implementation
                  Errors and Suggested Fixes</title>
                <pubdate>October 1993</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1982</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Elz</surname>
                    <firstname>R.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>R.</firstname>
                    <surname>Bush</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Serial Number Arithmetic</title>
                <pubdate>August 1996</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC4074</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Morishita</surname>
                    <firstname>Y.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>T.</firstname>
                    <surname>Jinmei</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Common Misbehaviour Against <acronym>DNS</acronym>
		Queries for IPv6 Addresses</title>
                <pubdate>May 2005</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
            </bibliodiv>
            <bibliodiv>
              <title>Resource Record Types</title>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1183</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Everhart</surname>
                    <firstname>C.F.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>L. A.</firstname>
                    <surname>Mamakos</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>R.</firstname>
                    <surname>Ullmann</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                    <surname>Mockapetris</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>New <acronym>DNS</acronym> RR Definitions</title>
                <pubdate>October 1990</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1706</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Manning</surname>
                    <firstname>B.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>R.</firstname>
                    <surname>Colella</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title><acronym>DNS</acronym> NSAP Resource Records</title>
                <pubdate>October 1994</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2168</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Daniel</surname>
                    <firstname>R.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>M.</firstname>
                    <surname>Mealling</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Resolution of Uniform Resource Identifiers using
                  the Domain Name System</title>
                <pubdate>June 1997</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1876</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Davis</surname>
                    <firstname>C.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                    <surname>Vixie</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>T.</firstname>
                    <firstname>Goodwin</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>I.</firstname>
                    <surname>Dickinson</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>A Means for Expressing Location Information in the
                  Domain
                  Name System</title>
                <pubdate>January 1996</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2052</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Gulbrandsen</surname>
                    <firstname>A.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                    <surname>Vixie</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>A <acronym>DNS</acronym> RR for Specifying the
                  Location of
                  Services.</title>
                <pubdate>October 1996</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2163</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Allocchio</surname>
                  <firstname>A.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Using the Internet <acronym>DNS</acronym> to
                  Distribute MIXER
                  Conformant Global Address Mapping</title>
                <pubdate>January 1998</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2230</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Atkinson</surname>
                  <firstname>R.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Key Exchange Delegation Record for the <acronym>DNS</acronym></title>
                <pubdate>October 1997</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2536</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                  <firstname>D.</firstname>
                  <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                </author>
                <title>DSA KEYs and SIGs in the Domain Name System (DNS)</title>
                <pubdate>March 1999</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2537</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                  <firstname>D.</firstname>
                  <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                </author>
                <title>RSA/MD5 KEYs and SIGs in the Domain Name System (DNS)</title>
                <pubdate>March 1999</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2538</abbrev>
		<authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                    <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                  </author>
		  <author>
		    <surname>Gudmundsson</surname>
		    <firstname>O.</firstname>
		  </author>
		</authorgroup>
                <title>Storing Certificates in the Domain Name System (DNS)</title>
                <pubdate>March 1999</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2539</abbrev>
		<authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                    <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                  </author>
		</authorgroup>
                <title>Storage of Diffie-Hellman Keys in the Domain Name System (DNS)</title>
                <pubdate>March 1999</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2540</abbrev>
		<authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                    <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                  </author>
		</authorgroup>
                <title>Detached Domain Name System (DNS) Information</title>
                <pubdate>March 1999</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2782</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Gulbrandsen</surname>
                  <firstname>A.</firstname>
                </author>
                <author>
                  <surname>Vixie</surname>
                  <firstname>P.</firstname>
                </author>
                <author>
                  <surname>Esibov</surname>
                  <firstname>L.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>A DNS RR for specifying the location of services (DNS SRV)</title>
                <pubdate>February 2000</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2915</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Mealling</surname>
                  <firstname>M.</firstname>
                </author>
                <author>
                  <surname>Daniel</surname>
                  <firstname>R.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>The Naming Authority Pointer (NAPTR) DNS Resource Record</title>
                <pubdate>September 2000</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3110</abbrev>
                <author>
                    <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                    <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                </author>
                <title>RSA/SHA-1 SIGs and RSA KEYs in the Domain Name System (DNS)</title>
                <pubdate>May 2001</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3123</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Koch</surname>
                  <firstname>P.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>A DNS RR Type for Lists of Address Prefixes (APL RR)</title>
                <pubdate>June 2001</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3596</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Thomson</surname>
                    <firstname>S.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>C.</firstname>
                    <surname>Huitema</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>V.</firstname>
                    <surname>Ksinant</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>M.</firstname>
                    <surname>Souissi</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title><acronym>DNS</acronym> Extensions to support IP
                  version 6</title>
                <pubdate>October 2003</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3597</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Gustafsson</surname>
                  <firstname>A.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Handling of Unknown DNS Resource Record (RR) Types</title>
                <pubdate>September 2003</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
            </bibliodiv>
            <bibliodiv>
              <title><acronym>DNS</acronym> and the Internet</title>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1101</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Mockapetris</surname>
                  <firstname>P. V.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title><acronym>DNS</acronym> Encoding of Network Names
                  and Other Types</title>
                <pubdate>April 1989</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1123</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Braden</surname>
                  <surname>R.</surname>
                </author>
                <title>Requirements for Internet Hosts - Application and
                  Support</title>
                <pubdate>October 1989</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1591</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Postel</surname>
                  <firstname>J.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Domain Name System Structure and Delegation</title>
                <pubdate>March 1994</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2317</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Eidnes</surname>
                    <firstname>H.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>G.</firstname>
                    <surname>de Groot</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                    <surname>Vixie</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Classless IN-ADDR.ARPA Delegation</title>
                <pubdate>March 1998</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2826</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Internet Architecture Board</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>IAB Technical Comment on the Unique DNS Root</title>
                <pubdate>May 2000</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2929</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                    <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Brunner-Williams</surname>
                    <firstname>E.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Manning</surname>
                    <firstname>B.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Domain Name System (DNS) IANA Considerations</title>
                <pubdate>September 2000</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
            </bibliodiv>
            <bibliodiv>
              <title><acronym>DNS</acronym> Operations</title>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1033</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Lottor</surname>
                  <firstname>M.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Domain administrators operations guide.</title>
                <pubdate>November 1987</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1537</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Beertema</surname>
                  <firstname>P.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Common <acronym>DNS</acronym> Data File
                  Configuration Errors</title>
                <pubdate>October 1993</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1912</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Barr</surname>
                  <firstname>D.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Common <acronym>DNS</acronym> Operational and
                  Configuration Errors</title>
                <pubdate>February 1996</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2010</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Manning</surname>
                    <firstname>B.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                    <surname>Vixie</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Operational Criteria for Root Name Servers.</title>
                <pubdate>October 1996</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2219</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Hamilton</surname>
                    <firstname>M.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>R.</firstname>
                    <surname>Wright</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Use of <acronym>DNS</acronym> Aliases for
                  Network Services.</title>
                <pubdate>October 1997</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
            </bibliodiv>
	    <bibliodiv>
              <title>Internationalized Domain Names</title>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2825</abbrev>
		<authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>IAB</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Daigle</surname>
                    <firstname>R.</firstname>
                  </author>
		</authorgroup>
                <title>A Tangled Web: Issues of I18N, Domain Names,
		       and the Other Internet protocols</title>
                <pubdate>May 2000</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3490</abbrev>
		<authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Faltstrom</surname>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Hoffman</surname>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Costello</surname>
                    <firstname>A.</firstname>
                  </author>
		</authorgroup>
                <title>Internationalizing Domain Names in Applications (IDNA)</title>
                <pubdate>March 2003</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3491</abbrev>
		<authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Hoffman</surname>
                    <firstname>P.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Blanchet</surname>
                    <firstname>M.</firstname>
                  </author>
		</authorgroup>
                <title>Nameprep: A Stringprep Profile for Internationalized Domain Names</title>
                <pubdate>March 2003</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3492</abbrev>
		<authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Costello</surname>
                    <firstname>A.</firstname>
                  </author>
		</authorgroup>
                <title>Punycode: A Bootstring encoding of Unicode
		       for Internationalized Domain Names in
		       Applications (IDNA)</title>
                <pubdate>March 2003</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
	    </bibliodiv>
            <bibliodiv>
              <title>Other <acronym>DNS</acronym>-related RFCs</title>
              <note>
                <para>
                  Note: the following list of RFCs, although
                  <acronym>DNS</acronym>-related, are not
                  concerned with implementing software.
                </para>
              </note>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1464</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Rosenbaum</surname>
                  <firstname>R.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Using the Domain Name System To Store Arbitrary String
                  Attributes</title>
                <pubdate>May 1993</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1713</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Romao</surname>
                  <firstname>A.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Tools for <acronym>DNS</acronym> Debugging</title>
                <pubdate>November 1994</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1794</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Brisco</surname>
                  <firstname>T.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title><acronym>DNS</acronym> Support for Load
                  Balancing</title>
                <pubdate>April 1995</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2240</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Vaughan</surname>
                  <firstname>O.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>A Legal Basis for Domain Name Allocation</title>
                <pubdate>November 1997</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2345</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Klensin</surname>
                    <firstname>J.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>T.</firstname>
                    <surname>Wolf</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>G.</firstname>
                    <surname>Oglesby</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Domain Names and Company Name Retrieval</title>
                <pubdate>May 1998</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2352</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Vaughan</surname>
                  <firstname>O.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>A Convention For Using Legal Names as Domain Names</title>
                <pubdate>May 1998</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3071</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Klensin</surname>
                    <firstname>J.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Reflections on the DNS, RFC 1591, and Categories of Domains</title>
                <pubdate>February 2001</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3258</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Hardie</surname>
                    <firstname>T.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Distributing Authoritative Name Servers via
		       Shared Unicast Addresses</title>
                <pubdate>April 2002</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3901</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Durand</surname>
                    <firstname>A.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>J.</firstname>
                    <surname>Ihren</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>DNS IPv6 Transport Operational Guidelines</title>
                <pubdate>September 2004</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2352</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Vaughan</surname>
                  <firstname>O.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>A Convention For Using Legal Names as Domain Names</title>
                <pubdate>May 1998</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
            </bibliodiv>
            <bibliodiv>
              <title>Obsolete and Unimplemented Experimental RFC</title>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC1712</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Farrell</surname>
                    <firstname>C.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>M.</firstname>
                    <surname>Schulze</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>S.</firstname>
                    <surname>Pleitner</surname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                    <surname>Baldoni</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title><acronym>DNS</acronym> Encoding of Geographical
                  Location</title>
                <pubdate>November 1994</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2673</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Crawford</surname>
                    <firstname>M.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Binary Labels in the Domain Name System</title>
                <pubdate>August 1999</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2874</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Crawford</surname>
                    <firstname>M.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Huitema</surname>
                    <firstname>C.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>DNS Extensions to Support IPv6 Address Aggregation
		       and Renumbering</title>
                <pubdate>July 2000</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
            </bibliodiv>
            <bibliodiv>
              <title>Obsoleted DNS Security RFCs</title>
	      <note>
		<para>
		  Most of these have been consolidated into RFC4033,
		  RFC4034 and RFC4035 which collectively describe DNSSECbis.
		</para>
	      </note>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2065</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                    <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <firstname>C.</firstname>
                    <surname>Kaufman</surname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Domain Name System Security Extensions</title>
                <pubdate>January 1997</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2137</abbrev>
                <author>
                  <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                  <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                  <firstname>D.</firstname>
                </author>
                <title>Secure Domain Name System Dynamic Update</title>
                <pubdate>April 1997</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC2535</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Eastlake</surname>
                    <lineage>3rd</lineage>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Domain Name System Security Extensions</title>
                <pubdate>March 1999</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3008</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Wellington</surname>
                    <firstname>B.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Domain Name System Security (DNSSEC)
		       Signing Authority</title>
                <pubdate>November 2000</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3090</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Lewis</surname>
                    <firstname>E.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>DNS Security Extension Clarification on Zone Status</title>
                <pubdate>March 2001</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3445</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Massey</surname>
                    <firstname>D.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Rose</surname>
                    <firstname>S.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Limiting the Scope of the KEY Resource Record (RR)</title>
                <pubdate>December 2002</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3655</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Wellington</surname>
                    <firstname>B.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Gudmundsson</surname>
                    <firstname>O.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Redefinition of DNS Authenticated Data (AD) bit</title>
                <pubdate>November 2003</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3658</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Gudmundsson</surname>
                    <firstname>O.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Delegation Signer (DS) Resource Record (RR)</title>
                <pubdate>December 2003</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3755</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Weiler</surname>
                    <firstname>S.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Legacy Resolver Compatibility for Delegation Signer (DS)</title>
                <pubdate>May 2004</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3757</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Kolkman</surname>
                    <firstname>O.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Schlyter</surname>
                    <firstname>J.</firstname>
                  </author>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Lewis</surname>
                    <firstname>E.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>Domain Name System KEY (DNSKEY) Resource Record
		      (RR) Secure Entry Point (SEP) Flag</title>
                <pubdate>April 2004</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
              <biblioentry>
                <abbrev>RFC3845</abbrev>
                <authorgroup>
                  <author>
                    <surname>Schlyter</surname>
                    <firstname>J.</firstname>
                  </author>
                </authorgroup>
                <title>DNS Security (DNSSEC) NextSECure (NSEC) RDATA Format</title>
                <pubdate>August 2004</pubdate>
              </biblioentry>
            </bibliodiv>
          </bibliography>
        </sect2>
        <sect2 id="internet_drafts">
          <title>Internet Drafts</title>
          <para>
            Internet Drafts (IDs) are rough-draft working documents of
            the Internet Engineering Task Force. They are, in essence, RFCs
            in the preliminary stages of development. Implementors are
            cautioned not
            to regard IDs as archival, and they should not be quoted or cited
            in any formal documents unless accompanied by the disclaimer that
            they are "works in progress." IDs have a lifespan of six months
            after which they are deleted unless updated by their authors.
          </para>
        </sect2>
        <sect2>
          <title>Other Documents About <acronym>BIND</acronym></title>
          <para/>
          <bibliography>
            <biblioentry>
              <authorgroup>
                <author>
                  <surname>Albitz</surname>
                  <firstname>Paul</firstname>
                </author>
                <author>
                  <firstname>Cricket</firstname>
                  <surname>Liu</surname>
                </author>
              </authorgroup>
              <title><acronym>DNS</acronym> and <acronym>BIND</acronym></title>
              <copyright>
                <year>1998</year>
                <holder>Sebastopol, CA: O'Reilly and Associates</holder>
              </copyright>
            </biblioentry>
          </bibliography>
        </sect2>
      </sect1>
    </appendix>

    <reference id="Bv9ARM.ch10">
      <title>Manual pages</title>
      <xi:include href="../../bin/dig/dig.docbook"/>
      <xi:include href="../../bin/dig/host.docbook"/>
      <xi:include href="../../bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.docbook"/>
      <xi:include href="../../bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.docbook"/>
      <xi:include href="../../bin/check/named-checkconf.docbook"/>
      <xi:include href="../../bin/check/named-checkzone.docbook"/>
      <xi:include href="../../bin/named/named.docbook"/>
      <!-- named.conf.docbook and others? -->
      <!-- nsupdate gives db2latex indigestion, markup problems? -->
      <xi:include href="../../bin/rndc/rndc.docbook"/>
      <xi:include href="../../bin/rndc/rndc.conf.docbook"/>
      <xi:include href="../../bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.docbook"/>
    </reference>

  </book>

<!--
  - Local variables:
  - mode: sgml
  - End:
 -->
